0% found this document useful (0 votes)

281 views

OfficeServ 7200 Programming Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Omar

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

281 views

OfficeServ 7200 Programming Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Omar

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 425

Ed.

OfficeServ 7200

Programming Guide
10. 2004.
COPYRIGHT
This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.
No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial
purposes or disclosed to third parties in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd.

TRADEMARKS
OfficeServTM is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.

Please read this guide before using the OfficeServ 7200, and follow the instructions to use the OfficeServ 7200
system safely and correctly.

This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior
notice.

For further information on the updated guide or have a question the content of guide, contact Document Center at the
address below.
Address : Document Center 2nd Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Metan-3dong Yeongtong-gu,
Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600
e-mail : [email protected]

http://www.samsungdocs.com

©2004 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

INTRODUCTION

Purpose
This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7200 system users.
OfficeServ 7200 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.
Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine
Communication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone.

Document Content and Organization

This guide is composed of two Chapters and one Annex. Each chapter is introduced as
follows:

CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC Programming

This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the
buttons of digital phone and cautions.

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.

ANNEX A. ABBREVIATION
Acronyms frequently used in this document are described.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. I

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this document to point out information that
must be read. This information may be set-off from the surrounding text, but is always
preceded by a bold title in capital letters.

WARNING
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
personal injury or fatality.

CAUTION
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
a service failure or damage to the system.

CHECKPOINT
Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.

NOTE
Indicates additional information as a reference.

OPERATION PROCEDURES
Indicates the operational procedures that should be executed in sequence.

II © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Reference
OfficeServ 7200 Installation Handbook
Introduces the installation related information and system configuration, main function, etc.
for OfficeServ 7200 system.

OfficeServ 7200 System Manual

Introduces the explanation related H/W, resource, etc. for OfficeServ 7200 system.

OfficeServ 7200 Installation Guide

Introduces the installation related information for OfficeServ 7200 system.

OfficeServ 7200 Service Manual

Introduces circuit configuration of each section in OfficeServ 7200 system, main functions,
parts list, troubleshooting, and disassembly diagram of main device.

OfficeServ 7200 Feature Server User’s Guide

Introduces the installation related information and explanation related application for
OfficeServ 7200 Feature Server system.

OfficeServ 7200 Data Server User’s Guide

Introduces the installation related information and explanation related application for
OfficeServ 7200 Data Server system.

Revision History
EDITION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS

00 10. 2004. First Edition

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. III

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

This page is intentionally left blank.

IV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

SAFETY CONCERNS

For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the
operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.

Symbols

Caution
Indication of a general caution

Restriction
Indication for prohibiting an action for a product

Instruction
Indication for commanding a specifically required action

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. V

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Warning

WARNING

When using the auto record feature

Before using the auto record feature make sure that you are not violating any
state or federal laws. Some states require that the recorded party be notified.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

Caution

CAUTION

CALL COST
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate
call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk
card.

The DECT System Code/Register handsets Change

Only the system administrator and/or installer should be allowed access to
change the DECT System Code and Register handsets.

When changing the MMC [807], [809], [812] and [816]

MMC [807], [809], [812] and [816] should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

Compliance with the National Version Standard

For the national version, OfficeServ 7200 is designed to comply with the standard
of the corresponding country. Therefore, in case the ‘Program 812 Program the
national standard change’ needs to be used, please call the service company
assigned by Samsung to get an expert’s advice.

VI © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION I

Purpose...............................................................................................................................................I
Document Content and Organization .................................................................................................I
Conventions .......................................................................................................................................II
Reference..........................................................................................................................................III
Revision History ................................................................................................................................III

SAFETY CONCERNS V

Symbols ............................................................................................................................................ V
Warning ............................................................................................................................................ VI
Caution............................................................................................................................................. VI

CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC Programming 1-1

1.1 Introduction to Programming ..................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Phone Buttons.............................................................................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 DS-4000 Series phones ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000D Series Phones................................................................................................. 1-3

1.3 Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................... 1-5

1.4 Program List by User’s Level ..................................................................................................... 1-6

1.4.1 Station Level Programming ................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4.2 Operator Level Programming ............................................................................................. 1-7
1.4.3 Technician Level Programming ........................................................................................ 1-13

1.5 Program List by Name ............................................................................................................. 1-15

1.6 Program List by Function ......................................................................................................... 1-22

1.6.1 Phone Function................................................................................................................. 1-22
1.6.2 Networking Function ......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.3 VoIP Function.................................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6.4 WLAN Function................................................................................................................. 1-24
1.6.5 LCR Function .................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function.................................................................................. 1-25

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. VII

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.7 Diagnosis Function ............................................................................................................1-26

1.6.8 Hotel Function....................................................................................................................1-26

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming 2-1

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure........................................................................................2-1

2.2 Programming Procedure..............................................................................................................2-2

[100] STATION LOCK.....................................................................................................................2-2
[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ...............................................................................................2-4
[102] CALL FORWARD ..................................................................................................................2-5
[103] SET ANSWER MODE ...........................................................................................................2-7
[104] STATION NAME ....................................................................................................................2-9
[105] STATION SPEED DIAL .......................................................................................................2-11
[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME............................................................................................2-13
[107] KEY EXTENDER.................................................................................................................2-14
[108] STATION STATUS...............................................................................................................2-17
[109] DATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................2-19
[110] STATION ON/OFF ...............................................................................................................2-21
[111] PHONE RING TONE ...........................................................................................................2-23
[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK...............................................................................................2-24
[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER.......................................................................................................2-26
[114] PHONE VOLUME ................................................................................................................2-27
[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .......................................................................................2-29
[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-30
[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE........................................................................................................2-32
[118] CONFERENCE GROUP .....................................................................................................2-33
[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY ..........................................................................................................2-35
[120] LARGE LCD OPTION .........................................................................................................2-37
[121] PHONE LANGUAGE...........................................................................................................2-39
[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED...................................................................................................2-42
[125] EXECUTIVE STATE ............................................................................................................2-43
[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING ...............................................................................2-45
[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE ..................................................................................2-47
[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.......................................................................................2-48
[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE ...........................................................................................................2-50
[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-51
[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL ..........................................................................................................2-52
[206] BARGE-IN TYPE.................................................................................................................2-53
[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT ........................................................................................................2-54

VIII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE .......................................................................................................... 2-55

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE............................................................................................... 2-56
[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT ................................................................................ 2-57
[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................. 2-61
[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION...................................................................................... 2-62
[215] VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS .........................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[216] VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-63
[217] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ........................................................................................................ 2-63
[220] STATION PAIR.................................................................................................................... 2-64
[221] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION.............................................................................................. 2-65
[222] EXTENSION TYPE............................................................................................................. 2-67
[223] FAX PAIR ............................................................................................................................ 2-69
[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ........................................................................................... 2-70
[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION................................................................................ 2-72
[301] ASSIGN STATION COS ..................................................................................................... 2-74
[302] PICKUP GROUPS.............................................................................................................. 2-76
[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ............................................................................................ 2-77
[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................. 2-78
[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE................................................................................................... 2-80
[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................. 2-81
[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE ...................................................................... 2-82
[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE .................................................................................... 2-84
[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE................................................................................................. 2-86
[312] ALLOW CALLER ID............................................................................................................ 2-87
[313] COPY STN/TRK USE......................................................................................................... 2-88
[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL ............................................................................................ 2-89
[315] BRANCH GROUP .............................................................................................................. 2-90
[316] DISTINCTIVE RINGING ..................................................................................................... 2-91
[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ..................................................................................... 2-93
[318] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE ........................................................................................... 2-94
[319] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION....................................................................................... 2-95
[320] PRESET FWD NO ANSWER ............................................................................................. 2-96
[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER ............................................................................................... 2-98
[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK................................................................................. 2-100
[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE ................................................................................................... 2-102
[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE .......................................................................................................... 2-103
[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS....................................................................................................... 2-104
[404] TRUNK NAME .................................................................................................................. 2-106
[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER............................................................................................... 2-107

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. IX

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT ...........................................................................................2-109

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ............................................................................................ 2-110
[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE...................................................................................... 2-111
[409] TRUNK STATUS READ .................................................................................................... 2-112
[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK....................................................................................................... 2-114
[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE ............................................................................................... 2-114
[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL ................................................................................................. 2-118
[413] VMS CALL TYPE...............................................................................................................2-120
[414] ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS (Malaysia and Israel Only) ..............................................2-121
[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA .................................................................................2-123
[416] ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN .....................................................................................2-124
[418] R2MFC SIGNALING .........................................................................................................2-126
[419] TRUNK NIGHT GROUP....................................................................................................2-128
[420] PRS SIGNAL .....................................................................................................................2-129
[421] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL..................................................................................................2-131
[422] TRUNK TMC GAIN............................................................................................................2-133
[423] S/T MODE .........................................................................................................................2-134
[424] BRI S0 MAPPING..............................................................................................................2-135
[425] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ........................................................................................2-136
[426] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION .....................................................................................................2-137
[427] PRI OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................2-138
[428] BRI OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................2-140
[429] MSN DIGIT ........................................................................................................................2-144
[430] TRUNK COS......................................................................................................................2-146
[433] COST RATE ......................................................................................................................2-148
[434] CONNECTION STATUS....................................................................................................2-149
[436] INSERT DIGIT ...................................................................................................................2-152
[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS............................................................................................2-153
[501] SYSTEM TIMERS .............................................................................................................2-155
[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS ..................................................................................................2-163
[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMER .......................................................................................................2-165
[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ..........................................................................................2-167
[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME.................................................................................................2-168
[506] TONE CADENCE ..............................................................................................................2-169
[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME ...............................................................................................2-171
[508] CALL COST..................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[509] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ..................................................................................................2-173
[510] SLI RING CADENCE ........................................................................................................2-174
[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE.....................................................................................2-176

X © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[513] HOTEL TIMER .................................................................................................................. 2-177

[514] TONE SOURCE................................................................................................................ 2-178
[515] ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE.............................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP ......................................................................................... 2-179
[601] SIGN STATION GROUP................................................................................................... 2-180
[602] STATION GROUP NAME ................................................................................................. 2-185
[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP................................................................................................. 2-186
[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ................................................................................ 2-188
[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................. 2-189
[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK.................................................................................................. 2-190
[607] UCD OPTIONS ................................................................................................................. 2-192
[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK................................................................................................ 2-197
[609] CALL LOG BLOCK ........................................................................................................... 2-198
[610]ASSIGN R2 CALL TYPE (China Only)..........................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING............................................................................................. 2-199
[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE..................................................................................... 2-200
[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP ...................................................................................... 2-201
[615] MGI GROUP ..................................................................................................................... 2-202
[616] MGI USER ........................................................................................................................ 2-204
[700] COPY COS CONTENTS .................................................................................................. 2-205
[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS............................................................................................... 2-206
[702] TOLL DENY TABLE .......................................................................................................... 2-210
[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE.............................................................................................. 2-212
[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER........................................................................................... 2-214
[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL ...................................................................................... 2-215
[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ................................................................................... 2-217
[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE ................................................................................................. 2-219
[708] ACCOUNT CODE ............................................................................................................. 2-220
[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ................................................................... 2-221
[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE ............................................................................................................ 2-223
[711] LCR TIME TABLE ............................................................................................................. 2-224
[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE ......................................................................................................... 2-225
[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE............................................................................................. 2-227
[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION..................................................................... 2-229
[715] ROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE .............................................................................. 2-232
[717] UCD AGENT ID ................................................................................................................ 2-234
[718] MY AREA CODE............................................................................................................... 2-235
[719] IDLE DISPLAY .................................................................................................................. 2-236
[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING .......................................................................................... 2-237

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XI

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ...........................................................................2-238

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ......................................................................................2-239
[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ......................................................................................2-244
[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN .................................................................................................2-246
[725] SMDR OPTIONS...............................................................................................................2-252
[726] VM/AA OPTIONS ..............................................................................................................2-255
[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ..............................................................................................2-261
[730] AA RECORD GAIN.......................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[731] AA RAM CLEAR ...........................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[732] AA TRANSLATION TABLE ...........................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[733] AA PLAN TABLE...........................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[735] AA USE TABLE.............................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[736] AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH.....................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[739] ASSIGN AA MOH .........................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[740] DECT SYSTEM CODE ................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[741] DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION...................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[743] DBS RESTART.............................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[744] BSI STATUS .................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[745] DBS STATUS................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[746] DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF .................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[747] BSI RF CARRIER.........................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[748] COSTING DIAL PLAN.......................................................................................................2-262
[749] RATE CALCULATION TABLE ...........................................................................................2-264
[750] VM CARD RESTART ........................................................................................................2-266
[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX ............................................................................................................2-268
[752] AUTO RECORD ................................................................................................................2-269
[753] WARNING DESTINATION ................................................................................................2-271
[754] VM HALT ......................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[755] VM ALARM ...................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[756] ASSIGN VM MOH ........................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[757] VM IN/OUT ........................................................................................................................2-272
[758] VM DAY/NIGHT .................................................................................................................2-273
[759] CLI RINGING................................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[760] ITEM COST TABLE ...........................................................................................................2-274
[761] TAX RATE SETUP.............................................................................................................2-276
[762] ROOM COST RATE ..........................................................................................................2-278
[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM .................................................................................2-279
[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE ...............................................................................2-280
[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER............................................................................2-281

XII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP............................................................................................... 2-282

[804] SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER..........................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[805] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY.......................................................................................... 2-283
[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL........................................................................................................ 2-284
[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL .......................................................................................... 2-286
[809] LEVEL AND GAIN............................................................................................................. 2-288
[810] HALT PROCESSING ........................................................................................................ 2-291
[811] RESET SYSTEM .............................................................................................................. 2-292
[812] SET COUNTRY CODE..................................................................................................... 2-294
[813] HOTEL OPERATION ........................................................................................................ 2-295
[814] SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE ............................................................................................ 2-296
[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY ...................................................................................... 2-297
[816] CONFERENCE GAIN...................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD................................................................................................. 2-299
[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL...................................................................................... 2-300
[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID............................................................................................... 2-302
[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ........................................................................................... 2-303
[822] SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE ..............................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS ................................................................................................ 2-304
[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION .................................................................................... 2-306
[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION ................................................................................... 2-308
[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK ....................................................................... 2-310
[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETER............................................................................................2-311
[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS............................................................................................. 2-313
[831] MGI PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................... 2-316
[832] VOIP ACCESS CODE ...................................................................................................... 2-318
[833] VoIP IP TABLE .................................................................................................................. 2-320
[834] H.323 OPTIONS ............................................................................................................... 2-322
[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS ......................................................................................................... 2-324
[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS......................................................................................................... 2-327
[837] SIP OPTIONS ................................................................................................................... 2-329
[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES ............................................................................................... 2-332
[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION............................................................................................... 2-333
[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 2-336
[844] IP STATION TYPE ............................................................................................................ 2-340
[845] WLAN PARAMETER ........................................................................................................ 2-343
[846] WIP INFORMATION ......................................................................................................... 2-349
[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK ............................................................................. 2-351
[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST ......................................................................................................... 2-352

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. XIII

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................2-353

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ......................................................................................2-355
[851] ALARM REPORTING ........................................................................................................2-356
[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS ...................................................................................2-358
[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY .....................................................................................................2-365
[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME...........................................................................................................2-367
[855] SYSTEM OPTIONS...........................................................................................................2-368
[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS ........................................................................................2-369
[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM .......................................................................2-370
[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-371
[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE ...................................................................................................2-372
[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS......................................................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.
[890] INITIALIZE PORT..............................................................................................................2-373

ANNEX A. ABBREVIATION A-1

A ~ C ............................................................................................................................................ A-1
D~I ............................................................................................................................................ A-2
K ~ N ............................................................................................................................................ A-3
O ~ S ............................................................................................................................................ A-4
T ~ V ............................................................................................................................................ A-5
W ~ X ............................................................................................................................................ A-6

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 DS-4028E phone ........................................................................................................1-2

Figure 1.2 DS-5038D phone........................................................................................................1-3
Figure 1.3 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D phone .....................................................................................1-3
Figure 1.4 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D phone .....................................................................................1-4

LIST OF TABLES

Table 2.1 Customer Set Relocation Allow Table.................Ошибка! Закладка не определена.

XIV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

CHAPTER 1. Overview Of MMC

Programming

In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone
buttons and cautions will be discussed.

1.1 Introduction to Programming

The MMC program means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation
program. There are 3 levels of MMC programming, such as technician, operator, and
station levels. According to the programming level, the station can program or cannot
program the data change. The technician level programming and the operator level
programming require a passcode for each level while the station level programming does
not require a passcode.

Program List by User’s Level

For information about the programming level classified by user’s level, refer to
‘1.4 Program List by User’s Level’ of this chapter.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-1

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.2 Phone Buttons

There are several phones that are allowed for MMC programming;
y DS-4000 series phones: DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-4008E
y DS-5000D series phone: DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D
y ITP-5000D series phone: ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D

1.2.1 DS-4000 Series phones

The following figure shows the shape of DS-4028E phone among DS-4000 series phones.

LCD Display

Left Soft Button Right Soft Button

A Button
B Button
Dial Buttons

Transfer Button Speaker

Button
ANS/RLS Button
Volume Buttons Hold Button

Figure 1.1 DS-4028E phone

Among 3 Soft buttons, the first one is called the ‘Left Soft button’, which is used to save
the modified data or to move the cursor inside the LCD display in the left direction.

Among 3 Soft buttons, the third one is called the ‘Right Soft button’, which is used to save
the modified data or to move the cursor in the right direction.

Among 8 programmable buttons, the first 6 programmable buttons are assigned as ‘A~F’ to
carry out specific functions or usage while programming. Generally, these buttons perform
specific functions that you set for each corresponding button.

When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable buttons are
as follows:
y Volume buttons: Search the selected items.
y Dial keypad: Confirm the status

1-2 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

y Soft buttons: Move the cursor

y Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program
y Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item
y A button: Select either a capital letter or small letter
y B button: Select either a Korean character or English character
y Transfer Button: Enter the programming code

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000D Series Phones

There are several DS/ITP-5000D series phones, such as DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D,
ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D as shown in the figures below:

LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft buttons

Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
A Buttons
B Buttons
Volume Buttons
Redial Button Programmable Buttons(17)

Dial Buttons Microphone

Speaker Button
Conference Button
Hold Button Transfer Button

Figure 1.2 DS-5038D phone

LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft buttons

Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
A Buttons
B Buttons
Volume Buttons
Redial Button

Navigation Buttons
Dial Buttons Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Hold Button Transfer Button

Figure 1.3 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D phone

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-3

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(14)
Soft buttons

Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
A Buttons
B Buttons
Volume Buttons
Redial Button

Navigation Buttons
Dial Buttons Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Hold Button Transfer Button

Figure 1.4 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D phone

The DS-5000D series phones have 38/21/14 programmable buttons that a station can
register any functions he/she wants to use. Also, there are several other function buttons:
the dial buttons, the volume button for controlling a voice volume, the redial button that
allows to redial the latest phone number, the conference button that can be used during the
conference, the transfer button that is used to transfer a call received during a phone
conversation to another station, the hold button to hold a call for a while, the speaker button,
and the navigation buttons that are designed for the convenience of phone users.

And, there is the LCD display that displays the station status and various other kinds of
information. With three colors like red, green, and yellow, the station status indicator
displays the current status of station.

1-4 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.3 Cautions in Programming

y Programming can be done while the handset is placed on the phone at a idle state.
y Programming can be done on any phone.
y Programming can be done only on the phone, not on normal phone.
y If the phone does not have the LCD display, press the numbers using the dial buttons
as instructed by the programming guide, without using the volume buttons. However,
if the phone does not have Soft buttons, certain programming cannot be done.
Therefore, only the station level programming is allowed on the phone that does not
have the LCD display.
y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, this means
that the entered data is invalid. Enter the correct data again.
y The content of the displayed message for each step shows the status after each step is
executed.
y If no key is pressed for a certain period of time during programming(Key program end
time, default is 60 seconds), it becomes a idle state from programming mode.
y If the phone is off hook while programming, it becomes a dial state from programming
mode.
y Before the modified data is confirmed by pressing [Left Soft] button or [Right Soft]
button, the [Speaker] or [Transfer] button is pressed to make it at a idle state or the
phone is unplugged. In this case, the data entered up to that time will be automatically
saved as the data displayed on the LCD.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-5

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4 Program List by User’s Level

The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.
The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and
station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced.

1.4.1 Station Level Programming

Programming can be done for only station level programs.

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 100 STATION LOCK

MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE
MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE
MMC: 104 STATION NAME
MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC: 108 STATION STATUS
MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY
MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF
MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE
MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
MMC: 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER
MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME
MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
MMC: 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
MMC: 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC: 120 LARGE LCD OPTION
MMC: 121 PHONE LANGUAGE
MMC: 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
MMC: 125 EXECUTIVE STATE

1-6 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.4.2 Operator Level Programming

An technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER
ACCESS MMC NUMBER
Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only
one phone at a time.

1.4.2.1 System Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

MMC: 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC: 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC: 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC: 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
MMC: 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL
MMC: 206 BARGE-IN TYPE
MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC: 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE
MMC: 209 ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
MMC: 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC: 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 217 ISDN SERVICE TYPE
MMC: 220 STATION PAIR
MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 223 FAX PAIR
MMC: 224 WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-7

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

MMC: 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC: 302 PICKUP GROUPS
MMC: 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
MMC: 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC: 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
MMC: 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
MMC: 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC: 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC: 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC: 313 COPY STN/TRK USE
MMC: 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
MMC: 315 BRANCH GROUP
MMC: 316 DISTINCTIVE RINGING
MMC: 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC: 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC: 319 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
MMC: 320 PRESET FWD NO ANSWER
MMC: 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER

1-8 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC: 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC: 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC: 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC: 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC: 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
MMC: 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
MMC: 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC: 409 TRUNK STATUS READ
MMC: 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
MMC: 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
MMC: 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MMC: 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC: 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
MMC: 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
MMC: 416 ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC: 418 R2MFC SIGNALING
MMC: 419 TRUNK NIGHT GROUP
MMC: 420 PRS SIGNAL
MMC: 421 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
MMC: 422 TRUNK TMC GAIN
MMC: 423 S/T MODE
MMC: 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
MMC: 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC: 426 E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
MMC: 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC: 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC: 429 MSN DIGIT
MMC: 430 TRUNK COS
MMC: 433 COST RATE
MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS
MMC: 436 INSERT DIGIT

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-9

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
MMC: 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC: 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS
MMC: 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
MMC: 504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
MMC: 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
MMC: 506 TONE CADENCE
MMC: 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC: 508 CALL COST
MMC: 509 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
MMC: 510 SLI RING CADENCE
MMC: 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC: 514 TONE SOURCE
MMC: 515 ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE

1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

MMC: 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC: 602 STATION GROUP NAME
MMC: 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
MMC: 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
MMC: 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
MMC: 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC: 607 UCD OPTIONS
MMC: 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
MMC: 609 CALL LOG BLOCK
MMC: 610 R2MFC CALL TYPE
MMC: 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
MMC: 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
MMC: 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

1-10 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 615 MGI GROUP
MMC: 616 MGI USER

1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC

The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as
follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 700 COPY COS CONTENTS

MMC: 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC: 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC: 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC: 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
MMC: 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC: 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC: 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC: 708 ACCOUNT CODE
MMC: 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
MMC: 717 UCD AGENT ID
MMC: 718 MY AREA CODE
MMC: 719 IDLE DISPLAY
MMC: 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC: 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC: 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC: 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC: 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-11

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR

MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE
MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE
MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC: 740 DECT SYSTEM CODE
MMC: 741 DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION
MMC: 743 DBS RESTART
MMC: 744 BSI STATUS
MMC: 745 DBS STATUS
MMC: 746 DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF
MMC: 747 BSI RF CARRIER
MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART
MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX
MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD
MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION
MMC: 754 VM HALT
MMC: 755 VM ALARM
MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT
MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT
MMC: 759 RING ASSIGNMENT BY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE

1-12 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.4.3 Technician Level Programming

This level is allowed to program every level of program.
This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be
done for only one phone at a time.

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

MMC: 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
MMC: 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
MMC: 803 ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
MMC: 804 SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER
MMC: 805 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
MMC: 806 CARD PRE-INSTALL
MMC: 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
MMC: 809 LEVEL AND GAIN
MMC: 810 HALT PROCESSING
MMC: 811 RESET SYSTEM
MMC: 812 SET COUNTRY CODE
MMC: 813 HOTEL OPERATION
MMC: 814 SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE
MMC: 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
MMC: 816 CONFERENCE GAIN
MMC: 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
MMC: 819 SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
MMC: 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
MMC: 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE
MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-13

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS
MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC: 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATIONES
MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
MMC: 844 IP STATION TYPE
MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER
MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC: 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
MMC: 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME
MMC: 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
MMC: 858 ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
MMC: 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
MMC: 860 UCD STATUS SERVICE
MMC: 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT

1-14 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.5 Program List by Name

This program list is arranged alphabetically

Program Description MMC Program No.

AA PLAN TABLE MMC: 733

AA RAM CLEAR MMC: 731
AA RECORD GAIN MMC: 730
AA TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 732
AA USE TABLE MMC: 735
ACCOUNT CODE MMC: 708
ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 116
ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 112
ALARM REPORTING MMC: 851
ALLOW CALLER ID MMC: 312
ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC: 612
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC: 611
ASSIGN AA MOH MMC: 739
ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC: 209
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC: 308
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY MMC: 303
ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS(Malaysia and Israel Only) MMC: 414
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC: 701
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC: 505
ASSIGN DAYLIGHT SAVING DATE MMC: 515
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC: 410
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE MMC: 304
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC: 605
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE MMC: 411
ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN MMC: 416
ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC: 305
ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC: 205
ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 751
ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 823
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 821
ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION MMC: 825
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC: 600
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC: 608

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-15

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Program Description MMC Program No.

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC: 507

ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC: 208
ASSIGN R2 CALL TYPE(China Only) MMC: 610
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC: 606
ASSIGN STATION COS MMC: 301
ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC: 601
ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC: 309
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC: 604
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE MMC: 317
ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM MMC: 858
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 820
ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC: 826
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC: 705
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP MMC: 803
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC: 603
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC: 408
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC: 412
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE MMC: 318
ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC: 203
ASSIGN VM MOH MMC: 756
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 207
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC: 704
AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC: 707
AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH MMC: 736
AUTO RECORD MMC: 752
BARGE IN TYPE MMC: 206
BRANCH GROUP MMC: 315
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART MMC: 425
BRI OPTIONS MMC: 428
BSI RF CARRIER MMC: 747
BRI S0 MAPPING MMC: 424
BSI STATUS MMC: 744
CALL COST MMC: 508
CALL FORWARD MMC: 102
CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC: 119
CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC: 323
CALL LOG BLOCK MMC: 609

1-16 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Program Description MMC Program No.

CARD PRE INSTALL MMC: 806

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC: 201
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC: 202
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC: 801
CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 101
CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 728
CLI RINGING MMC: 759
COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC: 204
CONFERENCE GAIN MMC: 816
CONFERENCE GROUP MMC: 118
CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC: 314
CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 434
COPY COS CONTENTS MMC: 700
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 720
COPY STN/TRK USE MMC: 313
COST RATE MMC: 433
COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 748
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC: 802
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC: 815
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION MMC: 300
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT MMC: 210
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC: 319
DATE DISPLAY MMC: 109
DBS RESTART MMC: 743
DBS STATUS MMC: 745
DECT CLEAR REGISTRATION MMC: 741
DECT REGISTRATION ON/OFF MMC: 746
DECT SYSTEM CODE MMC: 740
DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 854
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC: 724
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC: 714
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC: 214
DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC: 316
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 211
EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC: 117
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC: 800

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-17

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Program Description MMC Program No.

ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 830

EXECUTIVE STATE MMC: 125
EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 222
E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC: 426
FAX PAIR MMC: 223
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC: 407
HALT PROCESSING MMC: 810
HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 859
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC: 509
HOTEL OPERATION MMC: 813
HOTEL TIMER MMC: 513
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC: 306
H.323 GK OPTIONS MMC: 836
H.323 OPTIONS MMC: 834
IDLE DISPLAY MMC: 719
INITIALIZE PORT MMC: 890
INSERT DIGIT MMC: 436
IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC: 840
IP STATION TYPE MMC: 844
ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC: 217
ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 760
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER MMC: 829
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC: 310
LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 710
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 713
LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 712
LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 711
LEVEL AND GAIN MMC: 809
MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 853
MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 835
MGI GROUP MMC: 615
MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 831
MGI USER MMC: 616
MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC: 511
MSN DIGIT MMC: 429
MY AREA CODE MMC: 718

1-18 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Program Description MMC Program No.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-19

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Program Description MMC Program No.

STATION STATUS MMC: 108

STATION WIDE TIMERS MMC: 502
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP MMC: 614
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 852
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC: 841
SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER MMC: 804
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 723
SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE MMC: 814
SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 855
SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 861
SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC: 850
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC: 706
SYSTEM TIMERS MMC: 501
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 805
SYSTEM WIDE COUNTERS MMC: 500
S/T MODE MMC: 423
TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 761
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC: 856
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC: 703
TOLL DENY TABLE MMC: 702
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC: 709
TONE CADENCE MMC: 506
TONE SOURCE MMC: 514
TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 221
TRUNK COS MMC: 430
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC: 405
TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC: 402
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC: 421
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE MMC: 401
TRUNK NAME MMC: 404
TRUNK NIGHT GROUP MMC: 419
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 406
TRUNK STATUS READ MMC: 409
TRUNK TMC GAIN MMC: 422
TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC: 403
TRUNK WIDE TIMER MMC: 503

1-20 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Program Description MMC Program No.

UCD AGENT ID MMC: 717

UCD OPTIONS MMC: 607
UCD STATUS SERVICE MMC: 860
VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC: 113
VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 216
VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC: 215
VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 832
VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 833
VM ALARM MMC: 755
VM CARD RESTART MMC: 750
VM DAY/NIGHT MMC: 758
VM HALT MMC: 754
VM IN/OUT MMC: 757
VMS CALL TYPE MMC: 413
VM/AA OPTIONS MMC: 726
WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 753
WIP INFORMATION MMC: 846
WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC: 849
WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 848
WLAN PARAMETER MMC: 845
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK MMC: 847

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-21

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6 Program List by Function

This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ
7200.

1.6.1 Phone Function

The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the
OfficeServ 7200 are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 100 STATION LOCK

1-22 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.6.2 Networking Function

The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

1.6.3 VoIP Function

The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as
follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE
MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-23

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.4 WLAN Function

The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are
as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER

MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC: 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

1.6.5 LCR Function

The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

1-24 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function

The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are
as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC: 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN
MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR
MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE
MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE
MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE
MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART
MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX
MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD
MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION
MMC: 754 VM HALT
MMC: 755 VM ALARM
MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH
MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT
MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 1-25

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.7 Diagnosis Function

The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME
MMC: 855 SYSTEM OPTIONS
MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT

1.6.8 Hotel Function

The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows:

MMC Program No. Program Description

MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC: 433 COST RATE
MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE
MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE

1-26 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure

Here, the order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method
of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.

The programming order is as follows:

1) Make the programmable state.

y Press the Transfer button at pause.
y Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.
y Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode.
y Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode.
y In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number
to be programmed.

2) Make the program number selectable state.

If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.
Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state
begin.

3) Select a program.
Enter the program number.
Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button.
Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.

4) Start programming the corresponding program.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-1

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2.2 Programming Procedure

This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure
corresponding to the MMC.

[100] STATION LOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all
stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:

No Type Description

0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.

1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make
and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When
in this mode the Hold button of the phone will flash slow RED.
2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the
Hold button of the phone will light steady RED.

CONDITIONS
y Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’.
If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.
y A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in
Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 100. [201] STN LOCK
Display shows: UNLOCKED

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN LOCK

OR UNLOCKED
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] STN LOCK
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. ?

3. Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1) [205] STN LOCK

OR LOCKED OUT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

2-2 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-3

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE

Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default
value of ‘1234’ . This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to
default.

Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or
unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.

CONDITIONS
y The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician
Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’.
y An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the
passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode.

Default passcodes
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 101. [201] PASSCODE
Display shows: PASSCODE:****

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] PASSCODE

OR PASSCODE:****
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.

3. Press Hold button to reset passcode. [205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:1234

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-4 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[102] CALL FORWARD

Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station
users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.

Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,

FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD
BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time,
provided that destinations have been entered for both.

No Type

0 FORWARD CANCEL
1 FORWARD ALL CALL
2 FORWARD BUSY
3 FORWARD NO ANSWER
4 FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 FORWARD DND

CONDITIONS
y When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set
at ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, the destination number
must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ to select
‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’.
y If the ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘OFF’ at ‘MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS’, call
forward cannot be set but can be canceled.(Default: ‘OFF’)
y The ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must both be set to ‘ON’ at ‘MMC 701 ASSIGN
COS CONTENTS’ in order to forward a call to an external number. If only the
‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default:
‘OFF’)

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-5

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 102. [201] FORWARD
Display shows: 0:FORWARD CANCEL

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] FORWARD

OR 0:FORWARD CANCEL
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0-5 to select forward type. [205] FORWARD

OR 1:ALL CALL:NONE
Press Volume button to select forward type l
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial destination number.(e.g., 201) [205] FORWARD

OR 1:ALL CALL:201
Press Volume button to select destination and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO. [205] FORWARD

OR CURRENTLY SET :YES
Press Volume button to select YES or NO
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 502 STATION TIMERS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

2-6 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[103] SET ANSWER MODE

Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone.
Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options:

No Type Description

0 RING MODE The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls
are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS Button or by lifting
the handset.
1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will
automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a
Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the
screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the
phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not
pressed the ANS/RLS Button or lifted the handset.
2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers
can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS Button or
handset must be used to answer calls.

CONDITIONS
Since the DS-12B digital phone is not equipped with a microphone, the phone operates in
voice announcement mode when a call arrives while set to auto answer mode. Users must
use the handset to reply to the caller.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL PHONES: RING

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 103. [201] ANS MODE
Display shows: RING MODE

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] ANS MODE

OR RING MODE
Press Volume button to select phone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] ANS MODE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. ?

3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode. [205] ANS MODE

OR VOICE ANNOUNCE
Press Volume button to select ring mode and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-7

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-8 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[104] STATION NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify an
individual station.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial
pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM
SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’ . Now press the number ‘2’
once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing ‘A’ button will change the letter from upper case to lower case.

Volume Up/Down keys

When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the
Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered by
using these keys.

COUNT 1 2 3 4 5

DIAL 0 < > . ) 0

DIAL 1 Space ? , ! 1
DIAL 2 A B C @ 2
DIAL 3 D E F # 3
DIAL 4 G H I $ 4
DIAL 5 J K L % 5
DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6
DIAL 7 P Q R S 7
DIAL 8 T U V * 8
DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9
DIAL * : = [ ] *

The # button can be used for the following special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-9

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 104. [201] STN NAME
Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN NAME

OR _
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter the station name using the procedure [205] STN NAME
described above and press Right Soft button SAM SMITH
to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-10 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL

Allows the system administrator or technician to program the personal speed dial locations
assigned to a station. This must be done for single line telephones because these stations
cannot access programming.

CONDITIONS
Each station may have up to 50 locations or bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed
Block.
The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or
trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial. These dial
digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group
access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)
F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 105. [201] SPEED DIAL
Display shows: 00:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] SPEED DIAL

OR 00:
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins, [205] SPEED DIAL
the display will be as shown and a new station SPDBLK NOT EXIST
may be selected.

3. Dial location number.(e.g., 05) [205] SPEED DIAL

OR 05:_
Press Volume button to select location and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-11

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by [205] SPEED DIAL

the number to be dialled.(e.g., 4264100) 05:9-4264100_
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
Press Hold button to clear an entry.
If an error is made, use DOWN arrow to step back.

5. Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106 Station Speed

Dial Name.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

2-12 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This name
enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial feature is used. The
directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial location by
viewing its name.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 106. [201] SPEED NAME
Display shows: 00:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] SPEED NAME

OR 00:
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display [305] SPEED NAME
will be as shown and a new station may be selected. SPDBLK NOT EXIST

3. Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01) [205] SPEED NAME

OR 01:_
Press Volume button to scroll through location
numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter the location name using the procedure [205] SPEED NAME
described above and press Right Soft button to 01:SAM SMITH
return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-13

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[107] KEY EXTENDER

Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to phone station.
In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys that
will make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have
extenders are listed below.

Feature Extender

AB Absence(extension number)
ACC Account code bin(000-999)
BOSS Boss and Secretary(1-4)
CR VM Call Record
CS UCD Call Status(UCD group number)
DIR Directory dial by name type(1-3)
DP Direct Pickup(extension or station group number)
DS Direct Station Select(station number)
FWRD Call Forward(0-7)
GPIK Group Pickup(01-99)
IG IN/Out of Group(station group number)
MMPG Meet Me Page(0-9, * )
MW Message Waiting(extension or station group number)
PAGE Page(0-9, * )
PARK Park Orbits(0-9)
RP Ring Plan(1-6)
RSV Room Status View(1-5)-Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only
SG Station Group(station group number)
PMSG Programmed Station Messaging(01-20)
SP UCD Supervisor(UCD group number)
SPD Speed Dial(00-49, 500-999)
VG SVM-800 Group Message(station group number)
VM VM Memo(extension or station group number)
VT Voice Transfer(VM group number)

When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are
attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.

2-14 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
<24 Button Digital Phone>

CALL1
CALL1 CALL2
CALL1 DT701
CALL1 DT702
CALL1 DT703
CALL1 DT704
CALL1

DT705
CALL1 DT706
CALL1 DT7017
CALL1 DT708
CALL1 DT709
CALL1 DT7010
CALL1

DT711
CALL1 DT712
CALL1 DT713
CALL1 DT714
CALL1 DT715
CALL1 DT716
CALL1

CONF
CALL1 SPD
CALL1 NONE
CALL1 PAGE
CALL1 CBK
CALL1 GPIK01
CALL1

＜48 Button AOM＞

DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-15

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 107. [201] EXT (MAST)
Display shows first station: 01:CALL1Æ

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] EXT (MAST)

OR 01:CALL1Æ
Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Press Right Soft button to program the phone. [201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1Æ
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through the phone and [201] EXT (AOM1)
AOM’s and use Right Soft button to move the cursor. 01:DSÆ

4. Enter key number.(e.g., 18) [205] EXT (MAST)

OR 18:DSÆ
Use Volume button to scroll through keys and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press the key to be programmed. [205] EXT (MAST)
Dial extender according to above table. 18:DS207Æ
System will return to this step. If no more entries,
press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

2-16 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[108] STATION STATUS

Displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a READ-ONLY MMC:

No Status Description

0 PORT NO Cabinet(1~3)/Slot(1~9)/Port(1~16)
1 TYPE Phone Type
2 PICKUP GROUP None, 01~99
3 SGR Station Group Number
4 BOSS-SECR None, 1-4
5 PAGE None, Page Zone(0~4, * )
6 COS 1, COS 2 COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)
9 TENANT GROUP Tenant Group Number(1~2)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE
PICKUP GRP: NONE
SGR: NONE
BOSS-SECR: NONE
PAGE ZONE: NONE
COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS
TENANT GRP: 1

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 108. [201] STN STATUS
Display shows first station: PORT:C1-S3-P01

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN STATUS

OR PORT:C1-S3-P05
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0~9 to select station status type. [205] STN STATUS

OR PICKUP GROUP:01
Press Volume button to select status and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-17

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS
MMC 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

2-18 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[109] DATE DISPLAY

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a
per-station basis or system-wide.

No Mode Description

0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options:

0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD DAY HH:MM
1 = WESTERN DAY DD MON HH:MM
1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00
1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00
2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
COUNTRY: WESTERN
CLOCK: 12 HOUR
DISPLAY: LOWER CASE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 109. [201] DAY FORMAT
Display shows: COUNTRY:WESTERN

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] DAY FORMAT

OR COUNTRY:WESTERN
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] DAY FORMAT
Press ANS/RLS button for all phones. COUNTRY:?

3. Dial 0~2 to select mode. [205] DAY FORMAT

OR COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
Press Volume button to scroll through modes and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Volume button to scroll through formats and

press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-19

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

2-20 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[110] STATION ON/OFF

Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.

No Feature Default Description

00 AUTO HOLD OFF Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if
a CALL button, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed
during that call.
01 AUTO TIMER ON Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk
Line call.
02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing
a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the
ANS/RLS button.
03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory
numbers without having to first lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.
04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons
on phone.
05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the latter part of page announcements
if phone becomes free during a page.
06 RING PREF. ON When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button
to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.
07 CALL COST OFF When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the
upper right corner of the phone display instead of
duration of the call.
08 AUTO CAMPON OFF When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to
camp-on to other phones without having to press a
CAMP-ON key.
09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer
Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or
BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.
A BGM source must be selected for this to work.
10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON, station users who have AME set must enter
their station password to listen to messages being left.
11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed
dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD
display when using speed dial.
12 CID REVW ALL ON When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an
extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls
that were not answered at the extension or by voice mail.
13 SECURE OHVA ON When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the
handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be
heard over the phone speaker.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-21

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Feature Default Description

14 NOT CONT.CID ON When OFF, the Caller ID will be continue display after the
phone user answered call.
15 AUTO ANS CO OFF When On, the incoming CO call will be answered follows
phone answer mode.
16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF When ON, 2 LINE LCD Keyset with navigation buttons
works as Enblock dialling mode. This option only works
when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is set to ENABLE in
MMC 861.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 110. [201] STN ON/OFF
Display shows: AUTO HOLD :OFF

2. Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 4) [201] STN ON/OFF
OR HOT KEYPAD :OFF
Press Volume button to select the option and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Press Volume button to select ON or OFF. [201] STN ON/OFF

Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2. HOT KEYPAD :ON
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

2-22 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[111] PHONE RING TONE

Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.
There are eight ring tones available at each phone. A short tone burst of the selection will
be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
FREQUENCY: 5

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 111. [201] RING TONE
Display shows: SELECTION 5

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] RING TONE

OR SELECTION 5
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] RING TONE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. SELECTION ?

3. Dial 1~8 to select ring tone. [205] RING TONE

OR SELECTION 5
Press Volume button to select ring tone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME
MMC 316 DISTINCTIVE RINGING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-23

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line telephones, as they
cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may
be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm, as described below. The
TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every
day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Secondary Pair
assignments(MMC 220) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not
ring the paired station.

No Type Description

0 NOTSET No alarm
1 TODAY Alarm only once
2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 112. [201] ALM CLK(1)
Display shows: HHMM:ÆNOTSET

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] ALM CLK(1)

OR HHMM:ÆNOTSET
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.

3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1) [205] ALM CLK(1)

OR HHMM:ÆNOTSET
Press Volume button to select alarm and
press Right Soft button.

4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format. [205] ALM CLK(2)

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm) HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET

2-24 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2) [205] ALM CLK(2)
OR HHMM:1300ÆDAILY
Press Volume button to select alarm type and press
Right Soft button to move cursor and return to
step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-25

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER

Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by
entering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13
characters can be entered.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 113. [201] VIEW MEMO
Display shows: 1:

2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor and add [205] VIEW MEMO
memo via dial keypad using procedure above. 1:NEED BREAD

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-26 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[114] PHONE VOLUME

Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off hook ring
volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page
volume for any or all phones.

No Type Description

0 RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
1 OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped
on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 8 the highest.
2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.
There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the
highest.
3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker
phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 16 the highest.
4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone
speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker
when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
RING VOLUME: 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4
HANDSET VOLUME: 4
SPEAKER VOLUME: 13
BGM VOLUME: 13
PAGE VOLUME: 13

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-27

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 114. [201] STN VOLUME
Display shows: RING VOLUME :4

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

3. Press Volume button to select volume type. [205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :13

4. Press Volume button to select volume. [205] STN VOLUME

SPEAKER VOL :08

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-28 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all phones. There
are 20 messages available. The last five message are can be modified by each phone user.

CONDITIONS
The first ten are pre-programmed and the remaining entries can be customized in MMC
715, Programmed Station Message.

DEFAULT DATA
NO MESSAGES SELECTED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 115. [201] PGMMSG(00)
Display shows: CANCEL PGM MSG

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] PGMMSG(00)

OR CANCEL PGM MSG
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] PGMMSG(??)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.

3. Dial an entry number to select message [205] PGMMSG(05)

Number.(e.g., 05) PAGE ME
OR
Press Volume button to select message and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 715 PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-29

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line telephones because they
cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may
be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a DAILY alarm, as described below.
The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings
every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is
sounded.

No Type Description

1 NOTSET No alarm
2 TODAY Alarm only once
3 DAILY Alarm daily at set time

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 116. [201] ALM REM(1)
Display shows: HHMM:ÆNOTSET

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] ALM REM(1)

OR HHMM:ÆNOTSET
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] ALM REM(1)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. HHMM:ÆNOTSET

3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2) [205] ALM REM(2)

OR HHMM:ÆNOTSET
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

2-30 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format. [205] ALM REM(2)

(e.g., 1300 for 1pm) HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET
Display will automatically advance to step 5.

5. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type. [205] ALM REM
(e.g., 2) HHMM:1300ÆDAILY
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Enter messages using above table and press [205] ALM REM
Right Soft button to return to step 2. Sam SMITH

7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-31

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text message for any station.
One station can use up to 10 text messages.

CONDITIONS
In MMC 611 Text Message Station set USED station only uses this feature. In case of a
large LCD phone, system set to USED automatically.

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
BLANK MESSAGE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 117. [201] TXTMSG(01)
Display shows: Blank Message

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] TXTMSG(01)

OR Blank Message
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 01~10 to select message. [205] TXTMSG(02)

OR Blank Message
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter messages using above table and press [205] TXTMSG(02)

Right Soft button to return to step 3. SAME TIME

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 611 TEXT MESSAGE STATION

2-32 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP

Allows the system administrator or technician to set one touch conference group using
GCONF key for any station. One station can use up to 5 conference groups, and each group
can be set 4 member except self station.
On conference member, allows both internal station or station group number and outgoing
access code plus external telephone number.

CONDITIONS
In MMC 612 Conference Group Station set USED station only uses this feature.
In case of a large LCD phone, system set to USED automatically.

INPUT CONFERENCE GROUP

Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

Conference group names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character.
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position.
For example, if the group name is ‘SAMSUNG’, press the number ‘7’ four times to get the
letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable
button will change the letter from upper case to lower case.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 118. [201] GRP(1)NAME
Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [203] GRP(1)NAME

OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1~5 to select group. [203] GRP(1)NAME

OR
Press Volume button to select group and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-33

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member. [203] GRP(1)MBR1

NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select name or member
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5. Enter conference member dial number and [203] GRP(1)MBR1

press Right Soft button to return to step 4. 9-2794296

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 612 CONFERENCE GROUP STATION

2-34 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY

Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per station basis.
Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display
depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:

No Type Description

0 NO DISPLAY No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.

1 NUMBER FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office
will be displayed first.
2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.
In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the
CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide
names.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NUMBER FIRST

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 119. [201] CID DISP
Display shows first station: NUMBER FIRST

2. Enter station number.(e.g., 205) [205] CID DISP

OR NUMBER FIRST
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR [ALL] CID DISP
Press ANS/RLS button to select all and press NUMBER FIRST
the Right Soft button..

3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2) [205] CID DISP

OR NAME FIRST
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-35

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 414 ASSIGN CID TRUNKS
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
MMC 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE

2-36 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[120] LARGE LCD OPTION

Allows the system administrator to set any of the large LCD phone for the following
options.

No Option Description

0 IDLE DISPLAY Sets whether to display ‘CARENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on LCD

at idle state
1 DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display ‘Dial Number’ or ‘Directory Name’ for ‘DS’
key on LCD
2 DIAL MODE Sets dial mode ENBLOCK or OVERLAP of phone
3 CONV DISP Sets whether to display first SOFT menu screen or AOM menu
screen on LCD at conversation state
4 CALENDAR Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR
screen on LCD at idle state
5 AOM CURSOR Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen(01~99, PREV
POSITION)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR
DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER
DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 120. [201] IDLE DISP
Display shows: CALENDER

2. Enter station number.(e.g., 205) [203] IDLE DISP

OR CALENDER
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR [ALL] IDLE DISP
Press ANS/RLS button to select all and press CALENDER
the Right Soft button..

3. Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 4) [203] DS KEY DSP
OR TEL NUMBER
Press Volume button to select the option and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-37

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Press Volume button to select ON or OFF. [203] DS KEY DSP

Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2. EXT NAME
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

2-38 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE

Allows phone users the ability to assign an LCD display based on user’s own language.

No Language

00 ENGLISH
01 GERMAN
02 PORTUGAL
03 NORSK
04 DANISH
05 DUTCH
06 ITALY
07 SPANISH
08 SWEDISH
09 SPANISH/USA
10 FRENCH/CANADA
11 KOREAN(Only DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D
digital Phone)

CONDITIONS
Although phone is able to display Korean language, when user select Korean language only
menu is displayed as Korean language. the rest is displayed English language.

DEFAULT DATA
ENABLE KOREAN LANGUAGE PNONE : KOREAN
DISABLE KOREAN LANGUAGE PHONE : ENGLISH

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 121. [201] LANGUAGE
Display shows: ENGLISH

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] LANGUAGE

OR ENGLISH
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] LANGUAGE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. ?

3. Dial 00~10 for language required. [205] LANGUAGE

OR GERMAN

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-39

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Press Volume button to make selection and

press Right Soft button.

2-40 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-41

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

Used to set the Smart news display speed. This timer is only related to the Smart News PC
Application Package.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
03

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 122. [201] CALL SPEED
Display shows first station: 03Æ

2. Enter station number.(e.g., 205) [205] CALL SPEED

OR 03Æ
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all.

3. Dial speed option.(03~10) [205] CALL SPEED

03Æ04

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-42 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE

Allows the system administrator or technician to set executive station’s the following
options.

No Option Description

0 EXEC STATE When inter-working with EASYSET, the state of executive station can
be displayed.
1 STATE(IN) If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(IN), the EASYSET display this
message.
2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(OUT), the EASYSET display this
message.
3 ANSWER MODE When the secretary call by BOSS key, the executive station ringing or
automatically answer follows this option.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.
State display messages are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character.
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
message is ‘CONFERENCE’, press the number ‘2’ three times to get the letter ‘C’. Now
press the number ‘6’ three times to get the letter ‘O’. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable button will
change the letter from upper case to lower case.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 125. [201] EXEC STATE
Display shows: IN THE ROOM

2. Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205) [205] EXEC STATE

OR IN THE ROOM
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-43

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3. Dial 0~3 for selects option. [205] EXEC STATE

OR IN THE ROOM
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 0~9 for selects state. [205] EXEC STATE

OR IN A MEETING
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-44 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming.
If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC,
the error message [NOT PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to
access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all
MMCs allowed in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number.

No Mode Description

0 DISABLE Open(enable) customer-level programming

1 ENABLE Close(disable) customer-level programming

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 200. ENABLE CUS.PROG.
Display shows: PASSCODE:

2. Enter passcode. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

Correct code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

DISABLE

Incorrect code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE ERROR

3. Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE ENABLE CUS.PROG.

or DISABLE and press Right Soft button. ENABLE
OR
Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level 201:CUS.PASSCODE

and press Volume button to select MMC. SELECT PROG. ID
OR
Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button
to enter MMC.

5. Press Transfer button to exit.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-45

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

2-46 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer Programming
from its current value.

CONDITIONS
y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.
y The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
PASSCODE: 1234

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 201. CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

2. Enter new passcode via dial keypad. CUST. PASSCODE

(maximum four digits) NEW CODE:****

3. Verify new passcode via dial keypad. CUST. PASSCODE

VERIFY :****

Passcode verified.(go to step 4) CUST. PASSCODE

OR VERIFY :SUCCESS
Passcode failure.
Return to step 2. CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-47

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

Used to change the passcodes for the following features.

No Feature Description

0 RING PLAN This is the passcode required to place the system in different ring
plans(RP) or change the ring time override(RTO).
1 DISA ALARM This is the passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when
the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.
2 ALARM CLR This is the passcode required to clear a ALARM generated by the
disconnection of BI-PMS SIO. -Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only.
3 AA RECORD This is the passcode required to record prompts for use with the AA
ports on the Auto Attendant card.
5 DELETE This is the passcode required to registration of DECT phone.
6 WLAN REGST This passcode is used to allow a change to be deleted from a room bill.

CONDITIONS
y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.
y The current passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN: 0000
DISA ALARM: 5678
ALARM CLR: 8765
AA RECORD: 4321
DECT REGST: 4321
DELETE: 9999
WLAN REGST: 0000

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 202. CHANGE PASSCODE
Display shows: RING PLAN :0000

2. Press Volume button to make selection and press CHANGE PASSCODE

Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry. AA RECORD :4321

3. Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad. CHANGE PASSCODE
AA RECORD :9999
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
Continue to change other passcodes.

2-48 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-49

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE

Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign Station Group for
a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by
the directory number(DN) entered.

Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one
item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all
four zone codes must be created.

Recipient Description

NONE-NO UA When there is no phone number

STATION Station number
STN GROUP Station group number
RING PAGE External speaker phone number
COMMON BELL Common bell phone number

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 203. ASSIGN UA PORT
Display shows current assignment: NONE-NO UA

2. Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205) ASSIGN UA PORT

OR 205 -STATION
Use Volume buttons to scroll through
available devices.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

2-50 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL

Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous
closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line
ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.

CONDITIONS
y When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to
station group.
y Common bell not set to night time ring should be set to station group so that all
stations of the group ring when one station rings.

DEFAULT DATA
CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 204. [3801]COM. BELL
Display shows current setting: CONTINUOUS

2. Dial common bell number. [3801]COM. BELL

OR CONTINUOUS
Press Volume button to make selection of common
bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.

3. Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation. [3802]COM. BELL

OR INTERRUPTED
Use Volume button to scroll through options and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-51

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL

Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MISC board. Each MISC
board can have up to a loud bell outputs.
The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be
assigned to control the loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.

CONDITIONS
The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be
assigned to control the loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.

DEFAULT DATA
UNASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 205. [3901]LOUD BELL
Display shows current setting. RING PAIR:NONE

2. Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902) [3902]LOUD BELL

OR RING PAIR:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor.

3. Enter station number.(e.g., 201) [3902]LOUD BELL

OR RING PAIR:201
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-52 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE

Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.

No Type Description

0 NO BARGE-IN Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in

status.
1 WITH TONE Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the barged-in
on station.
2 WITHOUT TONE Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the
barged-in on station and the barging-in station will be muted.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO BARGE-IN

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 206. BARGE IN TYPE
Display shows: NO BARGE IN

2. Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2) BARGE IN TYPE

OR WITHOUT TONE
Press Volume button to select barge-in type and
press Right Soft button.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-53

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive digits
designated in MMC 726 VM/AA Options and also receive a true disconnect signal upon
completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not key daughter boards, support disconnect signal.
Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice
mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program
and are protected against tones.

This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are
assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects a CADENCE
or a SVMi-8/16 card.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL PORT

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 207. [209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
Display shows:

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] VMAA PORT

OR NORMAL PORT
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 or 0 to select port type. [205] VMAA PORT

(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL) VMAA PORT
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-54 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE

Provides the flexibility to program single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing
and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be
met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports
data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.

No Type Description

0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence.

1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence.
2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and not supports off hook ring.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ICM RING

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 208. [209] RING TYPE
Display shows: ICM RING

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] RING TYPE

OR ICM RING
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2) [205] RING TYPE

OR DATA RING
Press Volume button to select option and press
Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-55

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned.
There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. The maximum
number of AOMs that can be assigned to a keyset is 4.

No OHVAED Status Description

0 OHVAED OFF Off-hook announcement is not played to the add-on-module

1 OHVAED ON Off-hook announcement is played to the add-on-module

CONDITIONS
AOM cannot be designated as master. If no AOM exists in a tenant, the ‘AOM NOT
EXIST’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE FOR MASTER

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 209. [301] AOM MASTER
Display shows first AOM: MASTER:NONE

2. Dial AOM number. [301] AOM MASTER

OR MASTER:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers
and use Soft buttons to move cursor.

3. Enter station number.(e.g., 301) [301] AOM MASTER

OR MASTER:201
Use Volume button for selection of stations and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-56 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

Allows the system administrator to set in system features on a per-tenant basis.
Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle
ON/OFF.

No Option Default Description

00 DISA PSWD ON When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA
password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension
number and DISA password are not required and the caller
has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.
01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not
route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR
routing tables
03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics
data on a per UCD group basis to print out on the IO port
which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99
seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and
manipulated by an external package or third party provided
software.
04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON, the system will insert the country code when
receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID
display call back feature.
05 DISA MOH OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial
tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the
caller dials a digit.
06 TRANSFER OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of
MOH ring back tone from the time a transfer is completed until the
call is answered by an internal party.
08 DID BSY ROUT OFF When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route
to to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk if CW is set to
OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will
camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the
call will re-route to the operator.
09 ALARM MOH ON When ON, if station user answer alarm ring, will hear station
MOH instead of dial tone.
12 CONF TONE OFF When ON, provides conference tone every conference tone
time.(Available in Australia or Italy only)
13 RECALL PIKUP ON When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using
Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.
This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls
recalling to a station.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-57

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Default Description

14 ICM EXT FWD OFF When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls
are placed to a station that has Call Forward External
programmed and set.
16 DID ERR TONE OFF This option was added to provide error tone when an invalid
DID number is received.
18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON, generates system alarm when a phone
disconnect or connect.
19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF When ON, generates system alarm when a phone maintains
off hook condition longer than timer.
20 SL SELF RING OFF When ON, generates ring during 10 seconds when a single
line phone dials self number and hang up.
21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON, generates busy tone when all station group
member busy for group call. This setting does not work for
Station Groups which have Unconditional Ring Mode.
24 TRANSFER OFF When OFF, a single line phone will be able to handle 2 calls
CANCEL simultaneously. Using the hook-flash to toggle between
them. When ON, a single line telephone will be able to
connect to the second call, but pressing the hook flash will
not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second
call and reconnect the single line telephone to the first call.
26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON, the system disconnects a call when transfer
recall.
29 ARD TONE CHK ON When OFF, the system use time for checking destination is
busy when auto retry.
30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON, the Australia type VPN enabled.
31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict when incoming
call.
32 ISDN OFF When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS
PROGCON message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without
CONNECT message.
33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When OFF, not printed VAT total line when Hotel
Report.(Available in Hotel/Motel enabled only)
36 DSS KEY DPU OFF When ON, directed pick-up the call when press ringing DS
key.
37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF When ON, an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR
where more than 11 digits are dialled then the first dialled
digits are shown on the phone display.
38 ONE TCH OFF When OFF, the forced account mode user can not use one
FACC touch account code(ACC) key.

2-58 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Default Description

39 SGR ALL OUT OFF When ON, the last of station group member can out of
group.
40 CHAIN FWD ON When ON, a call is directed to a station that may be
forwarded to another station that is call forwarded to a
VMAA, then the caller will be directed to the last station’s
mailbox it reached. When OFF, the caller will be directed to
the first station’s mailbox instead of the last.
41 TRK MONITER OFF When ON, can override to trunk and a call is connected
override extension when a original caller hang on. When
OFF, can override to extension only and a call is
disconnected when a original caller hang on.
42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF When ON, a MFR assigned for VoIP tandem call when a call
incoming from VoIP trunk to another trunk outgoing.
43 NTWK OFF When OFF, a call duration timer disabled via networking
AUTOTMR intercom call.
45 NO STAFF OFF When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in
COD HOTEL operation.
46 PERI UCD SIO OFF When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO
port.
47 AUTO OFF When the room is checked-out, the room status is changed
CLEANED to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room
status will be changed to AVAILABLE.
48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON, the CALL LOG review status will be appeared
when LNR button is pressed.
49 ISDN KEYFAC OFF When ON, if phone user press ‘*’ or ‘#’ during conversation
via BRI trunk, system send information message instead of
digit message.
50 CHK SPV TRK OFF When ON, if both trunks don’t have supervision feature then
cannot make outgoing transfer or unsupervised conference.
51 PRE FWD OFF When ON, a call arrives busy station, that is not set forward
BUSY busy, if preset no answer destination is available, a call re-
route to that destination immediately.
52 ORG DIAL LOG OFF When ON, originally dialled digit will be saved as outgoing
call log in Large LCD Phone. When OFF, invalid dialling such
as dialling of not exist station number will not be saved as
outgoing call log in Large LCD Phone.
53 TIE TRSF RCL ON When ON, the trunk call is transferred to the TIE line and is
not answered within transfer recall time, the call is recalled to
the original transferring station.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-59

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Default Description

54 VOIP REALRBT OFF When ON, the system will connect real path of outgoing
trunk to the incoming VOIP Trunk user instead of providing
the virtual ringback tone.
55 SMDR OFF When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in
AUT2ACC ACCOUNT field of SMDR.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 210. TEN. ON AND OFF
Display shows: DISA PSWD :OFF

2. Dial option number.(e.g., 00) TEN. ON AND OFF

Press Right Soft button to move cursor. DISA PSWD :OFF

3. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. TEN. ON AND OFF

OR DISA PSWD :ON
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.

OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-60 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door box button is pressed.
If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan 1 is used. Available Ring
Plan inputs are 1 through 6.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
STATION GROUP: 500

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 211. [229] DOOR RING
Display shows first door phone: 1:500 2:500

2. Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230) [230] DOOR RING

OR 1:500 2:500
Press Volume button to scroll through door phone
numbers and use the Right Soft button to move
cursor.
OR ALL] DOOR RING
Press ANS/RLS button to select All door ring. 1:500 2:500

3. Enter new ring plan number selection via dial [250] DOOR RING
Keypad. 1:301 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-61

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who
can clear the alarm also receives the notification.

CONDITIONS
y A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.
y The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLAN: 500

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 214. DISA ALARM RING
Display shows: 1:500 2:500

2. Enter in valid destination number for ring plan. DISA ALARM RING
(e.g., 217) 1:217 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter in valid destination number for another DISA ALARM RING

ring plan.(e.g., 249) 1:217 2:249
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

2-62 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[217] ISDN SERVICE TYPE

Assign the ISDN service type of single line telephone port. Service consist of BC(Bearer
Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).

No Type Description BC HLC

0 VOICE Voice service Speech -

1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3.1 kHz Audio FAX G2/G3
2 AUDIO 3.1 3.1 kHz Audio service 3.1 kHz Audio None
3 MODEM MODEM service 3.1 kHz Audio Telephony

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
VOICE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 217. [209] ISDN SVC
Display shows: VOICE

2. Enter the station number.(e.g., 210) [210] ISDN SVC

OR VOICE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

3. Select service type.(0-3) [210] ISDN SVC

OR AUDIO 3.1
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-63

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[220] STATION PAIR

Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a phone or single line
port. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR Class, and
DND attributes of the primary station.

If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects both
stations. Secondary stations when dialled will also ring the primary extension.
Message from secondary extension will display that(secondary) extension
numbers. Callback to extension(secondary) as well.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 220. [201] PRIMARY
Display shows: SECONDARY:NONE

2. Enter the primary station number via dial [201] PRIMARY

keypad.(e.g., 201) SECONDARY:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

3. Enter the secondary station number via dial [201] PRIMARY

keypad.(e.g., 205) SECONDARY:205
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 STATION FORWARDING
MMC 301 STATION COS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

2-64 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[221] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be
printed upon demand, every hour, at a programmed time of each day, or up to three
separate timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.

When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.
1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.
2 CANCEL The program return to previous menu if no report is ended.
PRINTOUT

When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:

No Option Description

0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.

1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the
totals are reset to ‘0’
2 EVERY HOUR A Traffic report will be printed every hour
3 TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to
report traffic within certain times of a day. A report is printed at the
end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’

When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the
last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING
D & T.

If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.

CONDITIONS
If user want use this function in OfficeServ 7200 system with MCP card, it must connect
LAN cable to MCP card and be connected to terminal with supporing TCP/IP function..

DEFAULT DATA
AUTO PRINT OFF

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-65

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 221. TRAFFIC REPORT
Display shows: MANUAL PRINTOUT

2. Dial 0 for demand or 1 for automatic print. TRAFFIC REPORT

OR AUTO PRINT OPTN
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

3. Dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option. TRAFFIC REPORT

OR DAILY HHMM:2359
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

4. Enter daily report time.(HHMM) TRAFFIC REPORT

DAILY HHMM:2200

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

2-66 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[222] EXTENSION TYPE

This MMC enables station ports to be defined for a specific use. Each telephone can be
designated as being one of the five(5) following types. These types can be changed by
dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft
button to select the type desired.

No Type Description

0 NORMAL STATION This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal
manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as
VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.
1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check in features as a smoking room.
2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check in features as a non smoking room.
3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting room stations will have the same
attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied
status but will not show up while scrolling through room status
lists.
4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use the
hotel motel features such as check in etc.
5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned to
pair station of GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO
SMOKING ROOM in MMC 223.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL STATION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 222. [201] PHONE USE
Display shows: NORMAL STATION

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 214) [214] PHONE USE

OR NORMAL STATION
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-67

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3. Dial 0 to 5 to select station type. [214] PHONE USE

OR GUEST NO SMOKING
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-68 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[223] FAX PAIR

This MMC enables a guest room to have a additional FAX line.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 223. [201] FAX PAIR
Display shows: NONE

2. Enter the room station number via dial keypad. [202] FAX PAIR
(e.g., 202) NONE
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

3. Enter the fax station number via dial keypad. [202] FAX PAIR
(e.g., 2902) 290
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-69

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

This MMC is enhance Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message when a
Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature will require an
Automated Attendant(AA) card be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is
answered, the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) that has been
recorded in the AA card. The end user will record this message and have the ability to
change it when desired Auto Attendant operation. The Wake Up message will have no
default ROM message assigned to it. However a ROM message(49-64) may also be
assigned as the Wake Up message if desired.

This MMC has three options.

No Option Description

0 AA GROUP Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up

call is answered. This destination can be a any AA groups.
1 MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is
answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message(1-
48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64).
2 GROUP BUSY Determines which tone source will be connected when a AA group
members are all busy. This destination can be a NONE, TONE or
extern music on hold.
If NONE set then dial tone connected, if TONE set then hold tone
connected.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
AA GROUP: NONE
MESSAGE NO: NONE
GROUP BUSY: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 224. WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
Display shows: AA GROUP :NONE

2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select. WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

OR AA GROUP :NONE
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

2-70 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

3. Enter the AA group number. WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

OR AA GROUP :520
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-71

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

Allows the following features to be enabled on a per-station basis.

No Option Default Description

00 ACCESS DIAL ON Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk

group by dialling its directory number(DN).
This selection should be turned to off when using LCR.
01 MICROPHONE ON Allows all 12 and 24 button phones to be used in the
speakerphone mode.
02 OFF-HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.
03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and
from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.
This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from
hold or park.
04 TGR ADV.TONE ON When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be
heard each time LCR advances to the next route.
05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be
forwarded to voice mail. When ON, Permits forward to
voice mail. When OFF, No forward to voice mail.
07 NGT PASSCODE ON When ON, the steps verifying the RING PLAN
passcode will be added in Ring Plan change.
08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print
intercom calls on SMDR.
09 FORWARD OVRD OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station call to
forwarded station, the call will not forward.
10 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station transfer a
call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will be
recall to operator instead of the station.
11 SLT PWR DISC OFF When the normal phone is transffered call state from
busy state, it is able to set no power to phone during
some time.

2-72 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 300. [201] CUS.ON/OFF
Display shows: ACCESS DIAL :ON

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] CUS.ON/OFF

OR ACCESS DIAL :ON
Press Volume button to select station.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all and press [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
Right Soft button to move cursor. ACCESS DIAL :ON

3. Press Volume button to select feature and [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

press Right Soft button to move cursor. ACCESS DIAL :ON

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

OR ACCESS DIAL :OFF
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.

5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-73

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS

Used to assign class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service that
are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. There are 6 ring plans based on the Ring
Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30.
Default is COS 01.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLANS 1-6: 01

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 301. [201] STN COS
Display shows first station: 1:01 2:01 3:01

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN COS

OR 1:01 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Left Soft button to advance Step 4.
OR [ALL] STN COS
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. 1:01 2:01 3:01

3. Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad. [205] STN COS
OR 1:01 2:01 3:01
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) [205] STN COS

OR 1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service
and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

2-74 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) [205] STN COS
OR 1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to move cursor
to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
previous step.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-75

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[302] PICKUP GROUPS

Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 99
pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can
only be in one pickup group at any given time.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 302. [201] PICKUP GRP
Display shows: PICKUP GRP:NONE

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] PICKUP GRP

OR PICKUP GRP:NONE
Use Volume button to select station number and
press Right Soft button.
OR [ALL] PICKUP GRP
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. PICKUP GRP:??

3. Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05) [205] PICKUP GRP

OR PICKUP GRP:05
Press Volume button to select group number.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to

enter more stations.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

2-76 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and
including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and
including four BOSS stations.

CONDITIONS
y A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).
y A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.
y A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another boss.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 303. BOSS STN:NONE
Display shows: SECR 1:NONE

2. Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205) BOSS STN:205

OR SECR 1:NONE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

3. Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4) BOSS STN:205

OR SECR 1:NONE
Press Volume button to select number and press
Right Soft button.

4. Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201) BOSS STN:205

OR SECR 1:201
Press Volume button to select station.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to BOSS STN:205
enter more SECR numbers. SECR 2:202
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and
continue entries.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-77

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

Allows trunk use groups on a per-station use group basis the ability to answer incoming
calls, to dial out or to do both.

CONDITIONS
y Stations are set within the use group number 001~300 and trunks are within the use
group number 301~500 at ‘MMC 614. ASSIGN USE GROUP’.
y If a station is set to NO Dial, the station will not have the ability to place a call.
y If the station is set to NO Answer, the station cannot answer an incoming call.

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ANS: YES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 304. (001) USE (301)
Display shows: DIAL:YES ANS:YES

2. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005) (005) USE (301)
OR DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Press Volume button to select station use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR (ALL) USE (301)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Group.

3. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 304) (005) USE (304)
OR DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Press Volume button to select trunk use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR (005) USE (ALL)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use DIAL:YES ANS:YES
Group.

4. Press Volume button to select YES/NO option. (005) USE (304)

OR DIAL:NO ANS:YES
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.

Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option. (005) USE (304)

OR DIAL:NO ANS:YES

2-78 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right

Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 313 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-79

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE

This MMC allows only one of the four options to be selected; the assignment of account
code with verification, account code without verification, authorization codes, or none on a
per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes.
The system supports 999 account codes that are verified when account codes verified is
selected. If account codes without verification is selected, then there will be no table used.

No Type Description
0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required(NOT forced strictly
voluntary).
1 AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid over four digit Authorization code
listed in AUTHORIZATION CODE Table(MMC 707).
2 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid account code listed in ACCOUNT
CODE Table(MMC 708).
3 ACCT NO VERIFIED Forces user to enter an account code but this code is NOT
verified. User can make up any code(any account code up to
12 digits including ∗ and #).

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 305. [201] FORCD CODE
Display shows: NONE

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] FORCD CODE

OR NONE
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2) [205] FORCD CODE

OR ACCT VERIFIED
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE

2-80 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Allows a station the ability to make a predetermined call similar to a ring down circuit,
upon the expiration of a timer(see MMC 502 STN TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer).

CONDITIONS
y The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an
external number.
y There can be a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for the external number.
y The access code for the trunk or trunk group access code is not counted as part of the 18.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 306. [201] HOT LINE
Display shows: NONE

2. Dial station number. [205] HOT LINE

OR NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter the hot line destination ie a station or [205] HOT LINE

trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of 9-1305P4264100_
18 outgoing digits after the access code for
the CO call. (see above list of options if needed)

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 502 STN TIMERS, OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-81

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

Assigns a background music source to the phones. There are 1 internal music source and
2 external music source with supporting MIS boards that are installed in the system.

CONDITIONS
y To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to
the external sound source of the MISC card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or
if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the
background music source, music will not be played even if the background music
function is enabled.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 308. [201] BGM SOURCE
Display shows current setting. BGM SOURCE:NONE

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] BGM SOURCE

OR BGM SOURCE:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.
OR [ALL] BGM SOURCE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. BGM SOURCE:?

3. Enter source number.(e.g., 371) [205] BGM SOURCE

OR BGM SOURCE:371
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

2-82 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-83

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

Assigns a Music on Hold source to the phones. There are 1 internal music source and 2
external music source with supporting MIS boards that are installed in the system.
CONDITIONS
y To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to
the external sound source of the MISC card.

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 309. [201] STN MOH
Display shows current setting: MOH SOURCE:NONE

2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN MOH

OR MOH SOURCE:NONE
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR [ALL] STN MOH
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. MOH SOURCE:?

3. Enter source number.(e.g., 371) [205] STN MOH

OR MOH SOURCE:371
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-84 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-85

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight
classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk advance
up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 310. [201] LCR CLASS
Display shows: LCR CLASS 1

2. Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205) [205] LCR CLASS

OR LCR CLASS 1
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] LCR CLASS
Press ANS/RLS button to select All stations. LCR CLASS ?

3. Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3) [205] LCR CLASS

OR LCR CLASS 3
Press Volume button to select class type and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

2-86 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID

Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be send or
displayed at with LCD phones.

Option Description

RCV Set whether to display CID.

SEND Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
RCV: YES
SND: YES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 312. [201] CID/ANI
Display shows: RCV:YES SND:YES

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] CID/ANI

OR RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] CID/ANI
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. RCV:YES SND:YES

3. Dial 0 or 1 to select receive option. [205] CID/ANI

OR RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select receive option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 0 or 1 to select send option. [205] CID/ANI

OR RCV:YES SND:YES
Press Volume button to select send option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-87

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[313] COPY STN/TRK USE

Provides a tool for duplicating station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station
user group to another. This can be done on a per-station use group basis or on all station use
groups.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 313. (001)COPY USABLE
Display shows: FROM:NONE

2. Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005) (005)COPY USABLE

OR FROM:NONE
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter station use group number to copy from (005)COPY USABLE

Cursor is returned to step 2. FROM:003
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

2-88 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

Allows the outgoing call restricted by call duration time, disconnect or confirm with tone.

No Type Description

0 NONE No action
1 CONFIRM TONE When a Trunk Line confirms tone time expiration, a call user
heard system confirmation tone and next a Trunk Line confirms
tone time started.
2 DISCONNECT When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire, a call is
disconnected.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 314. [201] CO CONFIRM
Display shows: NONE

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] CO CONFIRM

OR NONE
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] CO CONFIRM
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. NONE

3. Dial a feature option 0-2. [205] CO CONFIRM

OR CONFIRM TONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-89

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[315] BRANCH GROUP

Allows the assignment of stations into branch groups. There is a maximum of 99 branch
groups. When CO ring is ringing at station assigned the same branch group can answer the
incoming call by off hook.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 315. [201] BRANCH GRP
Display shows: BRANCH GRP:NONE

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] BRANCH GRP

OR BRANCH GRP:NONE
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] BRANCH GRP
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. BRANCH GRP:??

3. Dial a branch group number.(01-99) [205] BRANCH GRP

OR BRANCH GRP:10
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-90 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[316] DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific
station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. There is also a cadence control option to
perform a similar function for single line sets. There are eight ring tones available along
with a Follow Station(NO) option for the phones. There are 5 cadences and a follow station
option for SLT’s.
It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a
specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls into station group
come and group members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station
or a specific trunk so that calls from a high priority call will be placed at the front of the
group queue. If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has the
highest priority. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the
lowest.

Option No Description

TONE Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.
Option 1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring phones with this ring
frequency.
CADENCE Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
Option 1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the intercom ring
cadence.
2 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CO ring
cadence.
3 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the DOOR ring
cadence.
4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the ALARM ring
cadence.
5 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CALLBACK
ring cadence.

CONDITIONS
y Rings of digital phones are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the
originating internal/external station is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the
‘MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE’ of the terminating station. If the T is set to 1-8, the
bell rings according to the designated ring tone.
y Rings of common phones are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the
C(CADENCE) of the originating internal/external station is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings
according to the interval of ‘MMC 510 SLI RING CADENCE’ for each originating
station type. If the C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to the interval set at ‘MMC
510 SLI RING CADENCE’ regardless of the originating station type.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-91

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
T: NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING
C: NO FOLLOW STATION SETTING

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 316. [201] RING TONE
Display shows first station: T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

2. Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705) [705] RING TONE

OR T:NO C:NO PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select trunk or station
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1-8 to select ring tone. [705] RING TONE

OR T:5 C:NO PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence. [705] RING TONE

OR T:5 C:3 PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter priority level via dial keypad. [705] RING TONE

(1-9 or NO) T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

2-92 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

This MMC is used to allow or restrict stations from making intercom calls to each other
within the same tenant.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 317. (001) USE (001)
Display shows: DIAL:YES

2. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005) (005) USE (001)
OR DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR (ALL) USE (001)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use DIAL:YES
Groups.

3. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 004) (005) USE (004)
OR DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. (005) USE (004)

OR DIAL:NO
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-93

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[318] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to each other
within the same system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 318. (301) USE (301)
Display shows: DIAL:YES

2. Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305) (305) USE (301)
OR DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to selection and press
Right Soft button.
OR (ALL) USE (301)
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use groups. DIAL:YES

3. Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304) (305) USE (304)
OR DIAL:YES
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. (305) USE (304)

OR DIAL:NO
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

2-94 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[319] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician level access to
relocate or exchange similar stations in the system without wiring changes(see Allow Table
below).

CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 319. SET RELOCATION
Display shows: EXT_ EXT

2. Enter first station number.(e.g., 202) SET RELOCATION

Press Right Soft button to move cursor. EXT202 EXT_

3. Enter second station number.(e.g., 210) SET RELOCATE

Press Right Soft button to enter data. EXT202 EXT210

4. Display will return to STEP 1. SET RELOCATION

Go to STEP 2. EXT_ EXT
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-95

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[320] PRESET FWD NO ANSWER

Allows a technician to assign a default destination for FNA to each station on the system.
These destinations may be different for each station or they may be the same. The preset
FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different FNA
destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in
effect. Preset Forward No Answer time follows the station no answer forward timer.

Preset forward no answer can be assigned respectively for each type of call.

No Type Description

0 INT Preset forward no answer applies only to intercom call.

1 EXT Preset forward no answer applies only to incoming call.
2 BOTH Preset forward no answer applies to both intercom and incoming call.

When setting PRE FWD BUSY in MMC 210

If MMC 210. PRE FWD BUSY sets ON, the forward busy follows this feature.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 320. [201] PRESET FNA
Display shows: NONE OPT:BOTH

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] PRESET FNA

OR NONE OPT:BOTH
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] PRESET FNA
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. NONE OPT:BOTH

3. Dial valid number via keypad. [205] PRESET FNA

OR 202 OPT:BOTH
Press Volume button to select call type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

2-96 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Dial call type.(0, 1 or 2) [205] PRESET FNA

OR 202 OPT:EXT
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-97

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER

Allows a maximum 16 digits number to be entered and associated with a station or trunk
number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the
maximum 16 digits number entered will be the Calling Party Number sent on this outgoing
PRI call. There are 4 tables for system.
In case of empty, system use MMC 405: CO TRUNK NUMBER for the Calling Party
Number.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 323. [201] SEND CLIP
Display shows: 1:

2. Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230) [230] SEND CLIP

OR 1:
Press Volume button to select extension and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial table number. [230] SEND CLIP

OR 2:
Press Volume button to select table number and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4. Enter the Calling Party Number. [230] SEND CLIP

2:3055922900

5. Repeat Step 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling

Party Numbers.
OR
Repeat Steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk
and Calling Party Numbers.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-98 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 834 VOIP H.323 OPTIONS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-99

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.

No Option Default Description

0 1A2 EMULATION OFF When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations

can participate in a conversation on this trunk by
pressing the trunk key.
1 TRUNK INC DND OFF When this option is set to ON a trunk that is
programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or
DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND.
2 TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a
ringing stations call forwarding.
6 EFWD EXT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or
Received CLI from Trunk)
7 REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI
from Trunk)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
1A2 EMULATE : OFF
TRK INC. DND : OFF
TRK FORWARD : ON
EFWD EXT CLI : ON
REPEAT CLI : ON
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 400. [701] TRK ON/OFF
Display show: 1A2 EMULATE:OFF

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] TRK ON/OFF

OR 1A2 EMULATE:OFF
Press Volume button to select trunk.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all trunks and press [ALL] TRK ON/OFF
Right Soft button to move cursor to options. 1A2 EMULATE:?

3. Dial option number from above list.(0-4) [704] TRK ON/OFF

OR TRK FORWARD:ON

2-100 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Press Volume button to select option and press

Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. [704] TRK ON/OFF

OR TRK FORWARD:OFF
Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-101

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

Used to select the mode of the Trunk line. If the PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX
access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction(call barring).
This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNK LINES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 401. [701] PBX LINE
Display shows: CO LINE

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] PBX LINE

OR CO LINE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers and press Right Soft button to move.
OR [ALL] PBX LINE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. ?

3. Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for Trunk Line. [704] PBX LINE

OR PBX LINE
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-102 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Used to determine the dialling type of each Trunk line. There are three options:

No Type Description

0 DTMF TYPE Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

1 DIAL PULSE TYPE DIAL PULSE
2 R2MFC TYPE R2- Frequency

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: DTMF

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 402. [701] DIAL TYPE
Display shows: DTMF TYPE

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] DIAL TYPE

OR DTMF TYPE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR [ALL] DIAL TYPE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. ?

3. Dial 0 for DTMF, 1 for PULSE or 2 for [704] DIAL TYPE

R2MFC TYPE. DIAL PULSE TYPE
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 YSTEM TIMERS
MMC 503 RUNK-WIDE TIMERS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-103

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS

Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night
condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of
service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table.
The toll classes that are available are listed below with their entry numbers.

No Class Description

0 F-STN Follow station toll restriction

1 CLS-A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
2 CLS-B Follow toll class B
3 CLS-C Follow toll class C
4 CLS-D Follow toll class D
5 CLS-E Follow toll class E
6 CLS-F Follow toll class F
7 CLS-G Follow toll class G
8 CLS-H Follow toll class H(All restricted)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: F-STN

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 403. [701] TOLL CLASS
Display shows: 1:F-STN 2:F-STN

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] TOLL CLASS

OR 1:F-STN 2:F-STN
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR [ALL] TOLL CLASS
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. 1:F-STN 2:F_STN

3. Dial ring plan number(1~6) [704] TOLL CLASS

OR 1:F-STN 2:F-STN
Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.

2-104 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B) [704] TOLL CLASS

OR 1:CLS-B 2:F-STN
Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to store data and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 SSIGN STATION COS
MMC 507 SSIGN AUTO RING PLAN TIME
MMC 701 SSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-105

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[404] TRUNK NAME

Allows an 11-character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 404. [701] TRUNK NAME
Display shows:

2. Dial trunk.(e.g., 704) [704] TRUNK NAME

OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter trunk name using the procedure [704] TRUNK NAME

described above Press Right Soft button to TELECOMS
return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 TATION NAME
MMC 405 RUNK NUMBER

2-106 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Allows an 11-digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT NUMBERS
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a digit. Pressing the
desired key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory number is
426-4100, press the number 4 once to get the number 4. Now press the number 2 once for
number 2. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your number.

When the number you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
number, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the
Volume Down button to move the cursor left. A space can be entered by using
these keys.

COUNT 1 2 3 4 5

DIAL 0 0 < > . )

DIAL 1 1 Space ? , !
DIAL 2 2 A B C @
DIAL 3 3 D E F #
DIAL 4 4 G H I $
DIAL 5 5 J K L %
DIAL 6 6 M N O ^
DIAL 7 7 P Q R S
DIAL 8 8 T U V *
DIAL 9 9 W X Y Z
DIAL * * : = [ ]

The # button can be used for special characters:

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.
To input Korean language, refer to MMC 104.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-107

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 405. [701] CO TEL NO.
Display shows:

2. Dial trunk.(e.g., 704) [704] CO TEL NO.

OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter trunk number using the procedure described [704] CO TEL NO.
above. 3054264100

4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-108 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are
received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan
destinations are not input the default ring plan is ring plan 1.
CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 406. [701] TRK RING
Display shows: 1:500 2:500

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] TRK RING

OR 1:500 2:500
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR [All] TRK RING
Press ANS/RLS button for all. 1:500 2:500

3. Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to [704] TRK RING
move the next step. 1:500 2:500

4. Dial station number or station group number. [704] TRK RING

(e.g., 205) 1:205 2:500
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to the [704] TRK RING
next ring plan destination and repeat step 5. 1:205 2:501
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 5.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-109

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a
trunk lock-up.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 407. [701] TRK RELS.
Display shows: RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

2. Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] TRK RELS.

OR RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
Press Volume button selected trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR [ALL] TRK RELS.
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

3. Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO. [704] TRK RELS.

(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2) RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-110 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold(MOH) source can be
heard on each trunk. There are 1 internal music source and 2 external music source with
supporting MIS boards that are installed in the system Tel. Number 371 – 379.
CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the terminal box to the
external sound source of the MIS card.

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 408. [701] TRK MOH
Display shows: current setting. MOH SOURCE:TONE

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] TRK MOH

OR MOH SOURCE:TONE
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] TRK MOH
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. MOH SOURCE:?

3. Enter source number.(e.g., 371) [705] TRK MOH

OR MOH SOURCE:371
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 739 ASSIGN AA MOH
MMC 756 ASSIGN VM MOH

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-111

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ

Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to
quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk. This is a read-only MMC.

No Type Description

00 PORT Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port)

01 TYPE LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP
02 1A2 EMULATE 1A2 Emulation On/Off
03 TRK FORWARD Trunk Forward On/Off
04 LINE CO/PBX
05 DIAL DTFM/Dial Pulse
06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6 Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)
12-17 RING PLAN 1-6 Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)
18 MOH SOURCE MOH Source
19 DISA LINE DISA Status

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW TRUNK

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 409. [701] TRK STATUS
Display shows: PORT:C1-S5-P01

2. Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704) [704] TRK STATUS
OR PORT:C1-S5-P04
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter in desired option 00-12.(e.g., 02) [704] TRK STATUS

OR TYPE:LOOP TRUNK
Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-112 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-113

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Allows the system the ability to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA).
Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several
safeguards have been added. The end user must be informed of these to prevent
unnecessary service calls. DISA can lockout when a predetermined number of invalid
consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable
timer has expired.

CONDITIONS
y The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.
y The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office
line. DISA lines must be assigned to the Ring Plan(s).

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 410. [701] 123456
Display shows: DISA LINE:000000

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] 123456

OR DISA LINE:000000
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR [ALL] 123456
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. DISA LINE:000000
OR
3. Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan. [704] 123456
OR DISA LINE:001000
Using the dial pad press 1 to apply and 0 not to apply
to a particular Ring Plan and press Right Soft button
to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

Defines the type of signaling for each E1 trunk assigned to the card. There are four kinds of

2-114 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

trunks as detailed below. There are three types of signaling associated with E & M and DID.
E1 channels(1-30) that are not used should have TYPE programmed as UNUSED.

Trunk Signaling Comments

LOOP BR_14301_NOT BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 1/1914, FOR TEST

BR_14301_OPT BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 2/1914, FOR TEST
RU_LOOP RUSSIA, L, I/O, LOOP START
E&M IMMEDIATE COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
DELAYED COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
ITU_WINK COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
ITU_WINK_MPD COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BR_CONTINU BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BR_PULSED BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
BR_BLD_160 BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_N
BR_BLD_157 BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_O
BR_14102_NOT BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
BR_14102_OPT BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
RU_ADSE RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RU_HARRIS_UK RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RU_USER_ROM RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
AR_WINK ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
AR_WINK_MPD ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA_NO1 CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POL_WINK_MPD POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
DID IMMEDIATE COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
DELAYED COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
ITU_WINK COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
ITU_WINK_MPD COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BR_CONTINU BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BR_PULSED BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
RU_ADSE RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RU_HARRIS_UK RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RU_USER_ROM RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
AR_WINK ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
AR_WINK_MPD ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA_NO1 CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POL_WINK_MPD POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
UNUSE - -

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-115

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
An E1 card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7200 system. Otherwise, the ‘NO E1
TRUNK CARD’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 411. [701] E1 SIGNAL
Display shows: UNUSE

2. Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] E1 SIGNAL

OR UNUSE
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] E1 SIGNAL
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. ?

3. Press Volume button to trunk type select and [705] E1 SIGNAL

press Right Soft button to move cursor. E&M:IMMEDIATE

4. Press Volume button to signaling select and [705] E1 SIGNAL

press Right Soft button to move cursor. E&M:ITU_WINK

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
MMC 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS READ
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

2-116 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE

MMC 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
MMC 413 VMS CALL TYPE
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
MMC 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
MMC 416 ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN
MMC 418 R2MFC SIGNALING
MMC 419 TRUNK NIGHT GROUP
MMC 420 PRS SIGNAL
MMC 421 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
MMC 422 TRUNK TMC GAIN
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC 426 E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 429 MSN DIGIT
MMC 430 TRUNK COS
MMC 433 COST RATE
MMC 434 CONNECTION STATUS
MMC 436 INSERT DIGIT

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-117

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

Allows for the assignment of analog DID or E & M cards for proper signaling.
This MMC is only for analog types of DID/E & M trunks. These trunks can also use the
translation tables in MMC 714. The signaling condition types are as follows:

No Signaling condition type

0 IMMEDIATE START
1 DELAYED START
2 WINK START
3 NO ANSWER BACK
4 DIRECT BACK

CONDITIONS
An analog E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7200 system.
Otherwise, the ‘NO E & M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
IMMEDIATE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 412. [701] TRK SIGNAL
Display shows: IMMEDIATE START

2. Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] TRK SIGNAL

OR IMMEDIATE START
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] TRK SIGNAL
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. IMMEDIATE START

3. Enter desired trunk type selection from above list. [705] TRK SIGNAL
OR WINK START
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 416 E & M/DID RINGDOWN

2-118 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-119

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[413] VMS CALL TYPE

Defines the type of signaling for voice mail assigned trunk.

Type Description Default

AP ANSWERING PHONE NO
AT AUDIO TEX NO
AA AUTO ATTENDANT YES
VM VOICE MAIL NO

CONDITIONS
This program needs when VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT(SVM-800) is used.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 413. [701] CTYPE AP:N
Display shows: AT:N AA:Y VM:N

2. Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 702) [702] CTYPE AP:N

OR AT:N AA:Y VM:N
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks.

3. Enter 1 for YES, or 0 for NO. [702] CTYPE AP:N

OR AT:N AA:Y VM:N
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-120 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[414] ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS (Malaysia and Israel Only)

Allows the system administrator or technician to activate analog loop trunk Caller ID on a
per-trunk basis. Activating Caller ID will delay the incoming ring indication at the operator
by two ring cycles to allow for the collection of the calling party data.

Each trunk has the following options:

No Option Description

0 NORMAL This is not a Caller ID trunk.

1 CID TRUNK This is a Caller ID trunk.

Bellcore type data

Supports Bellcore type data only for Caller ID, others type will not supports.
Available in Australia, Israel and Italy only.

CONDITIONS
y Before setting CID display, check if the RCM option card is mounted on the MCP card
of the OfficeServ 7200 system.
y The trunk line must be that of a phone service provider that provides CID.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 414. [701] CID TRUNKS
Display shows: NORMAL

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] CID TRUNKS

OR NORMAL
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] CID TRUNKS
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. ?

3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change options. [705] CID TRUNKS

OR CID TRUNK

Press Volume button to select an option and [705] CID TRUNKS

press Right Soft button to return to step 2. CID TRUNK

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-121

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE

2-122 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of
abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CID, CLIP information has been collected on a per-
trunk basis. There are two options for this MMC as follows:

No Option Description

0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will not
be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These
records will continue to be stored in the station review list.
1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will be
printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list.
These records will also be stored in the station review list.

CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 415. [701] TRK ABNDN
Display shows: REPORT:YES

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] TRK ABNDN

OR REPORT:YES
Use Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO [705] TRK ABNDN

OR REPORT:NO
Use Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC 414 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-123

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[416] ASSIGN E & M/DID RINGDOWN

This MMC defines which ring destination table an E & M or DID trunk will follow
for incoming calls. There are three options for each trunk as defined below.

No Option Description

0 FOLLOW INCOM DGT When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the
destination that matches the digits received from the Trunk line.
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at the
destination defined in MMC 714 that matches the digits
received from the TRUNK LINE
2 FOLLOW TRK RING If this option is selected, press the Right Soft button and ‘NO.
RCV DIGIT’: will appear on the display. Here is where the
number of incoming digits from Trunk Line must be entered(0
through 4). When a trunk is set to this option calls will ring at
the destination defined in MMC 406 for that trunk. If the
destination defined in MMC 406 is a VMAA port or group then
the system will repeat the digits received from the CO to the
port when it answers.

CONDITIONS
R2MFC trunk lines only support the ‘FOLLOW INCOM DGT’ and ‘FOLLOW DID
TRANS’ options.

DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW INCOMING DIGIT

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 416. [701] EM/DD RING
Display shows: FOLLOW INCOM DGT

2. Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] EM/DD RING

OR FOLLOW INCOM DGT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] EM/DD RING
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. FOLLOW INCOM DGT

3. Dial option number.(0~2) [705] EM/DD RING

OR. NO. RCV DIGIT:00
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
If the FOLLOW TRK RING is selected, the
LCD display shows step 4.

2-124 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Enter the number of incoming digits. [705] EM/DD RING

NO. RCV DIGIT:00

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-125

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[418] R2MFC SIGNALING

Use this MMC to program each trunk’s R2MFC signal procedure.
Below explain the meaning of each option ;

No Option Description

0 CLG CLS REQ Calling Party Class Request Option about called party wants to ask
calling party class or not
1 CLG NUM REQ Calling Party Number Request Option about called party wants to ask
calling party Identification(tel. Number)
2 CLD STS RESP Called Party status Response Option about called party wants to send
his status or not for calling party’s class request
3 CLG CLS RESP Calling Party Class Response Option about calling party wants to
send his class or not for called party’s class request
4 CLG NUM RESP Calling Party Number Response Option about calling party wants to
reply to called party’s calling party number request or not
5 CLD STS REQ Called Party Status Request Option about calling party wants to ask
called party’s status or not
6 CLG EXT RESP Calling Party wants to send his Extension number or not for Called
Party’s Calling Party Number Request

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
CLG CLS REQ: ON
CLG NUM REQ: OFF
CLD STS RESP: ON
CLG CLS RESP: ON
CLG NUM RESP: ON
CLD STS REQ: ON
CLG EXT RESP: OFF

2-126 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 418. [701] R2MFC SIG
Display shows: CLG CLS REQ :ON

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] R2MFC SIG

OR CLG CLS REQ :ON
Press UP or DOWN to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] R2MFC SIG
Press ANS/RLS to select all. CLG CLS REQ :ON

3. Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and [701] R2MFC SIG

press Right Soft button to move cursor. CLG NUM REQ :ON

4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.

OR
Press UP or DOWN to select ON/OFF and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-127

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[419] TRUNK NIGHT GROUP

Allows the assignment of trunks to NIGHT group. When night start time is different from
each other office, they can change the RING PLAN mode of the CO line. There are 10
night groups.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 419. [701] NIGHT GRP
Display shows: NIGHT GRP :NONE

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] NIGHT GRP

OR NIGHT GRP :NONE
Press UP or DOWN to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter in valid group(0-9) [704] NIGHT GRP

OR NIGHT GRP :5
Press UP or DOWN key to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS to select all.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit. [ALL] NIGHT GRP
OR NIGHT GRP :?
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

2-128 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[420] PRS SIGNAL

Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse(MPD) or
a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.

A Meter Pulse Trunk will detect a C.O provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will
detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line When the other
party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.

There are three types of PRS mode: PRS 1, PRS 2

Type Description

PRS 1 When first PRS is detected, call duration is started. When second PRS is detected,
call duration timer stopped. The call is not released until hanging-on.
PRS 2 When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is
detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.

CONDITIONS
y If the trunk is designated as PRS detection, the call duration timer will be started and
the results printed on the SMDR record.
y PRS detection is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is
unsupervised by an internal party.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL(NONE)

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 420. [701] TRK PRS
Display shows: NONE

2. Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] TRK PRS

OR NONE
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-129

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3. Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3 or 3 [705] TRK PRS
for MPD or 4 for NORMAL. PRS 2
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through options and
use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

2-130 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[421] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two adjustments available
in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the
receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk. See the Trunk Gain Setting Tables for
level option definitions.

There are four types of adjustments as shown below:

No Trunk Gain Description

0 +0.0 No adjustment
1 +1.9 Up 1.9 dB
2 -6.0 Down 6.0 dB
3 -2.5 Down 2.5 dB

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0.0
RX: +0.0

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 421. [701] TRK GAIN
Display shows: RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

2. Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 705) [705] TRK GAIN

via the dial pad. RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Press Volume button to make selection and [705] TRK GAIN

press Right Soft button to move cursor. RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

4. Press Volume button to make selection and [701] TRK GAIN

press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5
return to Step 1.

5. Press ANS/RLS button to select all. [ALL] TRK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-131

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-132 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[422] TRUNK TMC GAIN

Allows loss levels of TMC for analog trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are
two adjustments available in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk
to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

CONDITIONS
y NONE

DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0 dB
RX: +0 dB

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 422. [701] TMC GAIN
Display shows: RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

2. Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 705) via the [705] TMC GAIN
dial pad. RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] TMC GAIN
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

3. Press Volume button to make selection and [705] TMC GAIN

press Right Soft button to move cursor. RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

4. Press Volume button to make selection and [701] TMC GAIN

press Right Soft button to move cursor and RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB
return to Step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-133

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[423] S/T MODE

Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.

No Type Description

0 TRUNK The BRI trunk port use ISDN trunk.

1 STATION The BRI trunk port use for ISDN phone.

CONDITIONS
The BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is
displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 423. [725] S/T MODE
Display shows first BRI: TRUNK

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 727) [727] S/T MODE

OR TRUNK
Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] S/T MODE
Press ANS/RLS button to select all. TRUNK

3. Enter Circuit type. [727] S/T MODE

OR STATION
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 424 S0 MAPPING
MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
MMC 428 BRI OPTION
MMC 429 MSN DIGIT

2-134 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING

This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the BRI card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 424. [8701]S0 MAPPING
Display shows first terminal number: NONE

2. Dial terminal number. [8704]S0 MAPPING

OR NONE
Press Volume button to make selection of terminal
numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.

3. Dial BRI port number. [8704]S0 MAPPING

OR 712
Use Volume button to scroll through ports and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 428 BRI OPTION
MMC 423 S/T MODE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-135

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[425] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART

This MMC is used to restart a BRI and a PRI card at the card level. This action is required
to update the processor on the BRI and PRI card to any changes in the card setup MMC’s
and to put these changes into effect.

CONDITIONS
y A BRI card or TEPRI card must be installed in the system.
y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI board must be set ‘ON’ to
PRI mode.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 425. [725] RESTART
Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit: CARD RESTART?NO

2. Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733) [733] RESTART

OR CARD RESTART?NO
Press Volume button to select the first trunk
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO. [733] RESTART

Pressing 1 will advance to step 4. CARD RESTART?YES

4. Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO. [733] RESTART

Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2. ARE YOU SURE?YES

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
MMC 427 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS

2-136 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[426] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.

CONDITIONS
y It is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30
framing.
y After changing this option, MMC 425 must be used to restart the card to make the
change effective.

DEFAULT DATA
CRC4: ON

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 426. [701] E1/PRI CRC
Display shows: ON

2. Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g 701) [701] E1/PRI CRC
OR ON
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF. [701] E1/PRI CRC

OR OFF
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-137

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[427] PRI OPTIONS

This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk board.

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.
1 PRI MODE PRI access mode select.
NORMAL Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line
with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel
and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.
2 DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select.
ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone.
OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.
3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. In case
of NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network. In
other cases, MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.
4 NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the
network.
UNKNOWN Unknown number
INT.NAT International number
NATIONAL National number
NETWORK Network specific number
SUBSCRIB Subscriber number
EXTEN Local number
ABBREV Abbreviated number
5 NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
network.
UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan
ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)
DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)
TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)
NATIONAL National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE Private numbering plan
EXTEN Local numbering plan

2-138 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI board must be set to ‘ON’
for PRI mode.
y After changing this program, execute ‘MMC 425 BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART’ to
apply the new setting.

DEFAULT DATA
CHANNEL ANY: YES
PRI MODE: DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 427. [701] PRI OPTION
Display shows: CHANNEL ANY:YES

2. Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730) [730] PRI OPTION
OR CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

3. Enter option number to make selection. [730] PRI OPTION

OR PRI MODE:DDI
Press Volume button to make selection.

4. Press Volume button to make selection. [730] PRI OPTION

Then press Right Soft button. PRI MODE:NORMAL

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 425 CARD RESTART
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-139

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[428] BRI OPTIONS

Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis and there are different options depending on
whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS

No Option Description

0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, you will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.
1 BRI MODE BRI access mode select.
P-P NOR Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with
one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
P-P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel
and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.
P-M NOR Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar
manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the
circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.
P-M MSN Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the
MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 429.
2 DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select.
ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone.
OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.
3 CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. In case
of NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network. In
other cases, MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.
4 NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the
network.
UNKNOWN Unknown number
INT.NAT International number
NATIONAL National number
NETWORK Network specific number
SUBSCRIB Subscriber number
EXTEN Local number
ABBREV Abbreviated number

2-140 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Description

5 NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
network.
UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan
ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)
DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)
TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)
NATIONAL National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE Private numbering plan
EXTEN Local numbering plan

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS

No Option Description

0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy(e.g.,
Preferred channel selection). If set to NO, the user will receive a busy
signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel
on that BRI is free(e.g., Exclusive channel selection).
1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or
NO)

CONDITIONS
y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.
y If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes
MUST be restarted using MMC 425 in order for the changes to become effective.

DEFAULT DATA
For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:
CHANNEL ANY: YES
BRI MODE: P-P DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN

For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:

CHANNEL ANY : YES
POWER FEED : NO

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-141

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 428. [725] BRI-TRK
Display shows first BRI channel. CHANNEL ANY:YES

2. Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727) [727] BRI-TRK

OR CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and
press Right Soft button.

3. Select option item. [727] BRI-TRK

OR CHANNEL ANY:NO
Press Volume button to select option item and
Press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-M MSN

[727] BRI-TRK
DLSEND :OVERLAP

[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE :NONE

[727] BRI-TRK
NB TYPE:UNKNOWN

4. Select option. [727] BRI-TRK

OR CLIP TABLE:1
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.

5. Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729) [729] BRI-STN

OR CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.

6. Select option item. [729] BRI-STN

OR CHANNEL ANY:YES
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :NO

7. Select option. [729] BRI-STN

OR POWER FEED :YES
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.

8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-142 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 425 CARD RESTART
MMC 429 MSN DIGITS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-143

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[429] MSN DIGIT

Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in
MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number,
either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is
cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.

If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,
MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is released by option.

You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select call waiting option:
when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the
station(which is alerted to the call).

CONDITIONS
y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.
y For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value
for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

DEFAULT DATA
1-6 : NONE
CW : YES
OPT : ACCEPT

2-144 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 429. [701] MSN DGT (1)
Display shows: DGT:

2. Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] MSN DGT (1)

OR DGT:
Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN
PORT and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4) [704] MSN DGT (4)

OR DGT:
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via [704] MSN DGT (4)

dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move DGT:4603881
to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12)

5. Enter destinations for 6 ring plan via dial [704] MSN DGT (4)
keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1) 1:204 2:NONE
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

6. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO. [704] MSN DGT (4)

OR CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

7. Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT. [704] MSN DGT (4)

OR CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 428 BRI OPTIONS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-145

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[430] TRUNK COS

Used to assign a class of service to each trunk during one of the 6 different ring plans
available. There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701 Assign
COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem
connections.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS COS 01

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 430. [701] TRK COS
Display shows first trunk: 1:01 2:01 3:01

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] TRK COS

OR 1:01 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and
press Left Soft button to advance step 4.
OR [ALL] TRK COS
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. 1:01 2:01 3:01

3. Enter day class of service.(e.g., 05) [705] TRK COS

OR 1:05 2:01 3:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
step 4.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Enter the next ring plan class of service. (e.g., 05) [705] TRK COS
OR 1:05 2:05 03:01
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to the
previous step.

2-146 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-147

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[433] COST RATE

In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk.
DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 748 Costing Dial Plan. RATE CALCULATION
TABLES are defined in MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates.
Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call
costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.

Call type 8 is fixed for incoming. Apply a cost rate under type 8 only to a trunk if you want
incoming call costing.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS NO COST RATE ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 433. [701] :12345678
Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate CR :00000000
table numbers:

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) [705] :12345678

OR CR :00000000
Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all.

3. Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until [701] :12345678
the cursor is under the Cost Rate mark.(e.g., 2) CR :01000000
Enter 1 for YES or O for NO and press Right Soft
button to return to step 1.
OR

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN
MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

2-148 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[434] CONNECTION STATUS

This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks.
Display status actually displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a
conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show one of the
conference parties and an arrow(Æ). The technician or system administrator can then
display the next parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state the display
will show ‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection the display will
show ‘INVALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU the display will
show ‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display
will show ‘BUSY’ only.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
Display trunk connection status
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display show connection status: 702 227

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 702 227
Press Transfer button to exit.

Display station connection status

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display show connection status. 235 715

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 235 715
Press Transfer button to exit.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-149

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Display trunk status in conference

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display shows connection status: 702 227 ,215 Æ

3. Press Right Soft button to display the next DISPLAY STATUS

station or trunks involved. 702 216 Æ

4. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 216 702 ,227 Æ
Press Transfer button to exit.

Display status no connection

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display show connection status. 702 NONE

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 702 NONE
Press Transfer button to exit.

Display status no connection

1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter invalid station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display show INVALID DATA: INVALID DATA

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 201 IDLE
Press Transfer button to exit.

Display connection status with invalid trunk

or station number
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter invalid station or trunk number DISPLAY STATUS

Display show INVALID DATA: INVALID DATA

2-150 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 201 IDLE
Press Transfer button to exit.

Display connection status with trunk or station

number in maintenance busy
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2. Enter station or trunk number. DISPLAY STATUS

Display show connection status: 725 MADE BUSY

3. Enter another station or trunk. DISPLAY STATUS

OR 725 MADE BUSY
Press Transfer button to exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 108 STATION STATUS
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-151

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[436] INSERT DIGIT

This MMC is used to tandem switching. For tandem switching, there is a need to more
digits than received digits from DID or E & M trunk. In this MMC, the inserted digits can
be assigned per trunk bases.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 436. [701] INSERT DGT
Display shows: NONE

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 702) [702] INSERT DGT

OR NONE

Press UP or DOWN to select trunk.

Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial maximum 4 digit and press Right Soft button [702] INSERT DGT
to store. 67

4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

2-152 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief
description of each.

No Counter Default Description

0 ALARM REM. 5 The number of times that an alarm reminder will

CNTER ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.
1 AUTO RDL 3 The number of times the system will redial an
COUNTER outside number after the auto redial feature has
been activated. RANGE = 1-99.
2 DISA CALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that
can be made after accessing a DISA line. RANGE =
1-99.
3 DISA LOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to
incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out
the DISA line. RANGE = -99
4 NEW CALL 99 Number of times the system will allow a user to
COUNTER signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.
RANGE = 1-99.
5 UCDS VISUAL 0 Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is
ALARM triggered when the number of calls waiting to be
answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is
triggered when the number of calls waiting to be
answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.
8 UCD CS LEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-153

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 500. ALARM REM.CNTER
Display shows: 05Æ

2. Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6) UCDS AUDIO ALARM

OR 00Æ
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter in new value via dial keypad. UCDS AUDIO ALARM

If entry is valid, system will return to step 2. 00Æ02

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-154 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS

Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.

TIMER TABLE
Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

ALARM TIME 100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start
ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.
ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100-2500 This timer sets the duration of the attention
MSEC tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice
Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone
will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.
ALM REM.INTERVAL 25 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time length between
ring attempts at a station when alarm
reminder is set.
ALM REM RING OFF 10 1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle
duration when alarm reminder is set at a
station.
ATT. RECALL TIME 30 0-250 SEC This is the length of time a transfer recall will
ring at a station before recalling the operator.
AUTO REDIAL INT. 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts
after RETRY dialling is set on a station.
AUTO REDIAL RLS. 45 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No
Answer condition on a retry number dialled
before the auto redial is automatically
cancelled.
BOOKING INT TIME 1-255 SEC In case of executing booking function, trial
interval time from new trunk call
BOOKING DELAY TM 1~25 SEC In case of executing booking function, after
user try to call trunk call, Time of attaching
tone receiver for detecting signal tone during
busy state
BOOKING DET TIME 2~255 SEC In case of executing booking function, after
attaching tone receiver, Time of waiting for
detecting busy state. If there isn’t detected
busy tone within booking det time, it is
played as to connecting call.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-155

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

CALLBACK NO ANS 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the
callback is automatically cancelled when a
callback detects Ring No Answer.
CAMP ON RECALL 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
camped-on call will stay at a destination
before recalling to the transferring station.
CID DISPLAY TIME 5 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID
information remains on the phone’s display.
CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will
allow a valid message from the analog CID
trunk.
CO CONFIRM TIME 3 0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type,
the outgoing call will be disconnected after
this timer or the outgoing caller will hear the
confirm tone every this time.
CO-CO 20 1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an
DISCONNECT unsupervised conference; when it expires,
both trunks are disconnected.
CONFIRM TONE TM 1000 100-2500 The tone heard when a feature is activated
MSEC or deactivated.
CRD TONE INT TM 30 0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An
entry other than zero will cause a tone to be
heard by all the parties in a recorded
conversation. The range for the tone is
001(every second) to 255(every 255 seconds).
A value of 000 means no tone. Requires SVMi
card.
DIAL PASS TIME 3 0-25 SEC This timer monitors the duration of time
before connecting the transmit of the phone
to the trunk side of an outgoing call.
DISA DISCONNECT 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a
DISA call.
DISA LOCK OUT TM 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the duration of time a
DISA call is not allowed to be made after
the DISA error counter has expired(MMC
500).

2-156 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

DISA NOANS DISC. 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
DISA call is disconnected by force when
called party does not answer.
DISA PASS CHECK 30 1-250 MIN This timer defines the time period before
the system clears the incorrect passcode
counter.
DISPLAY DELAY TM 2 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration a display is
shown in the LCD display. This timer also
controls the duration of time that error tone is
heard.
DOOR LOCK 500 100-2500 This timer controls the duration of time the
RELES. MSEC door lock relay will be activated.
DOOR RING 50 10-250 This timer controls the duration of time
DETECT MSEC before a call is answered by the door
phone.
DOOR RING OFF TM 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at
the door ring destination before
automatically cancelling.
E-HOLD RECALL TM 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
call is held exclusively at a station before
recalling.
FIRST DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will
wait for dialling to begin before dropping
the dial tone and returning the you to error
tone.
HOK FLASH MAX TM 800 20-2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook
MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental
hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.
HOK FLASH MIN TM 350 20-2500 This timer monitors the duration of a
MSEC hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is
valid and not a line noise or an accidental
hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.
HOOK OFF TIME 100 20-2500 This timer controls the time before dial tone
MSEC is sent to a single line station.
HOOK ON TIME 1000 20-2500 This timer sets the minimum amount of time
MSEC that the system will recognize as an SLT hang
up.
INQUIRY RELEASE 30 1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the
interaction of the Soft button to determine
when to return the LCD back to a normal
status. This timer affects only display
phones.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-157

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period
between dialling valid digits before
dropping the call and returning you back to
error tone.
ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period
between dialling valid digits and the end of
the dialling string on an ISDN call.
KMMC LOCK OUT 60 10-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between
TM programming actions while in a programming
session. The timer automatically returns the
system to secure programming status.
LCR ADVANCE 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time
TIME before selecting the next allowable route
when a station is allowed to route advance.
LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.
LONG KEY DETECT 600 0-2500 MSEC This timer controls the time a key must be held
down before the key press is repeated.
LONG KEY REPEAT 300 0-2500 MSEC This timer controls the time between
repeated digits on a long key press.
MS LED ON TIME 10 1-10 SEC This timer controls the duration a Manual
Signaling key will remain on after use.
OFF HOOK RING 15 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time
INT between ring bursts to a user who has a
camped-on call.
OHVA ANSWER 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time duration of an
TIME OHVA call before automatic rejection.
PAGE TIME OUT 20 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page
announcement.
PAGE TONE TIME 500 100-2500 This timer controls the duration of tone
MSEC burst heard over the page prior to the page
announcement.
PARK RECALL TIME 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of time a
call is parked before recalling to the call
park originator.
PC-MMC LOCK 5 1-60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity,
TIME drops the link if no action is created by
PCMMC and returns the system back to
secure program status.
PERI UCD REPORT 5 3-99 SEC This timer is the interval that a periodic
UCD report is provided to an SIO port.

2-158 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

POWER DOWN 2000 500-9900 This timer monitors the power to the ROM
TIME MSEC pack to begin shutdown status.
R/D RING ON 1-60 SEC In case of receiving ring down trunk call,
Maximum respone time
R/D SIGNAL ON 1-30 SEC In case of receiving ring down trunk call,
real ring time
R2MFC INCOM 14 10-30 SEC This timer controls the duration of waiting
TIME R2MFC signal before being made error
status in case of R2MFC incoming call.
R2MFC INTER TIME 2500 2000-7000 After this time, the system decides the user
MSEC finishes his/her dialling and processing
next procedure on R2MFC outgoing call.
R2MFC OUTGO 14 10-30 SEC This timer controls the duration of waiting
TIME R2MFC signal before being made error
status in case of R2MFC outgoing call.
RECALL 2 1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring
DISCONNECT before being disconnected.
RECALL WAIT TIME 15 0-250 SEC This is the time any recall(hold or transfer)
continues to recall at your station before it
recalls to the operator.
ROUTE OPTIMIZE 5 0-250 SEC When the call is made via Q-SIG signaling, the
route optimization is activated after this time.
SMDR START/DP 30 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR
recording for rotary
SMDR START/DTMF 15 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR
recording for touchtone dialling. This timer
also controls the LCD duration timer on the
phones. The duration time displayed and the
SMDR time duration will be the same.
SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be
left on hold before recalling back to the
holding station. This is a system-wide
timer. Setting timer to 000 will defeat this
feature and no recalling will take place.
TEMP RBACK 200-9900 MS In case of sending R2 signal, virtual ring
TONE back tone time
TRANSFER 20 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time transferred
RECALL calls ring before recalling. This is a system-
wide timer.
TSW CONN. DELAY 0 0-10 SEC When incoming trunk makes outgoing call
to another trunk, the system connects
voice path after this time.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-159

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

UCDS AUDIO 0 0-990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital
ALARM UCD package enabled, this counter
determines the maximum number of seconds
a call has been waiting at the UCD group
before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to
flash along with an audio alarm. For more
UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500.

2-160 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Timer Name Default Range Unit Description

UCDS VISUAL 0 0-990 SEC When an AA card is installed and the digital
ALARM UCD package enabled, this counter
determines the maximum number of
seconds a call at the UCD group before
the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash
as an alarm. For more UCD alarm
conditions, see MMC 500.

When the value is ‘0’

Certain timers are disabled when the value is ‘0’.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME TIMERS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-161

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 501. AA INT DGT TIME
Display shows first timer value: 05 SECÆ

2. Press Volume button to select timer and press KMMC LOCK OUT TM
Right Soft button to move cursor. 060 SECÆ

3. Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system KMMC LOCK OUT TM
returns to step 2 with new value. 060 SECÆ250

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-162 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS

Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.

No Item Description

0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No
Answer takes place.(1250 sec)
1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to
an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails
to recognize the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the
SLT port.(1009900 ms)
2 FDGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable
delay before generating DTMF digits for In Band integration.(1009900 ms)
3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call
as programmed in MMC 306.(0250 sec)
4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a
station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.
(1250 sec)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC
DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC
OFFHK SEL: 015 SEC
EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC
CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-163

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 502. [201] NO ANS FWD
Display shows: 015 SECÆ

2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205) [205] NO ANS FWD

OR 015 SECÆ_
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations and [ALL] NO ANS FWD
press Right Soft button. 015 SECÆ_

3. Enter new value(must be three digits) via [205] NO ANS FWD

dial keypad.(e.g., 020) 015 SECÆ020
System will return to step 2.

4. Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1) [205] DTMF DUR.

OR 0100 MS Æ_
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., [205] DTMP DUR.
0200) 0100 MS Æ0200
System returns back to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

2-164 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMER

Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks. It is
not advisable to change these values, with the exception of trunk Flash Time, without
assistance from Technical Support.

No Item Description Range

00 ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain 0-2500 MSEC
types of E & M signaling and does not affect normal
CO lines.
01 CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at 100-9900 MSEC
the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or
receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and
the expiration of this timer.
02 CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum 10-2500 MSEC
length of loop open disconnect received from the
CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the
system.
03 DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF 100-9900 MSEC
digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.
04 F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the 100-9900 MSEC
system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize
after seizure before sending DTMF digits.
05 FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on 20-2500 MSEC
a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.
06 NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after 1-25 SEC
detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the
call has disconnected.
07 PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before 1-25 SEC
sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial
bin.
08 PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the 0-2500 MSEC
PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is
answered and maintain the status before the
opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM
must be set to 0.
09 RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of 10-2500 MSEC
ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.
10 WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal 100-300 MSEC
that the system will send on an E & M circuit
11 MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of 100-9900 MSEC
DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as
100 ms.
12 MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after 0-25 SEC
incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the
wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-165

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC
CLEARING: 1000 MSEC
CO SUPV TM: 2500 MSEC
DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC
FLASH TIME: 0600 MSEC
NO RING TM: 04 SEC
PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC
PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC
RNG DET TM: 0350 MSEC
WINK TIME: 200 MSEC
MF/DP INT: 0700 MSEC
MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 503. [701] ANS.BAK TM
Display shows: 0600 MS Æ

2. Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) [704] ANS.BAK TM

OR 0600 MS Æ
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR [ALL] ANS.BAK TM
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks. 0600 MS Æ_

3. Dial timer number from the list. [704] DTMF DUR.

OR 0100 MS Æ_
Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200) [704] DTMF DUR.
System returns to step 2. 0100 MS Æ 0200

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-166 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the
make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.

No Item Description

0 MAKE/BREAK RATIO Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)

1 PLUS PER SECOND Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE
PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 504. MAKE/BREAK RATIO
Display shows: 33 MAKE Æ

2. Dial 0 or 1 for option. PULSE PER SECOND

OR 10 PPS Æ_
Press Volume button for selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial new value. PULSE PER SECOND

System returns to step 2. 10 PPS Æ 20

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-167

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.

Type Description Range

YY Year 00-99
MM Month 01-12
DD Date 01-31
W Day 0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)
HH Hour 00-23
MM Minute 00-59

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW SOFTWARE DATE 12:00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 505. OLD:0111095:0901
Display shows: NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

2. Enter new time and date using above table. OLD:0111095:0901

System returns to step 2. NEW:0111121:1445

3. Verify time and date. OLD:0111121:1445

Re-enter if necessary. NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS: AUTO UPDATE TIME

2-168 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[506] TONE CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis.
The system can provide eleven types of tone and three types of tones provided from
Central Office or PBX system can be detected. Please call Technical Support before
changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings.

No Item Description

00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.

01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge In with
Tone has been performed.
02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.
03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.
04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.
05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.
06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.
07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.
08 RING TONE This is the tone heard from ROP device or Loud Bell when these
devices are called.
09 TRANSFERER This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT
TONE hook flashes.
10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.
11 CO BUSY TONE This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.
12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or
PBX system.
13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
(a unit: milliseconds)
TONE ON OFF ON OFF

BUSY TONE 500 500 500 500

CONFIRM/BARGE-IN 200 200 200 5000
DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-169

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(a unit: milliseconds)
TONE ON OFF ON OFF

DND/NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250

ERROR TONE 500 500 500 500
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500
MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250
RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000
RING TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000
TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100
DID RINGBACK TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000
CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350
CO RINGBACK TONE 400 200 400 2000
CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 506. BUSY TONE
Display shows: INTERRUPT TONE

2. Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09) TRANSFERER TONE
OR INTERRUPT TONE
Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft
button and advance to step 3.

3. Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for TRANSFERER TONE

INTERRUPT. INTERRUPT TONE
OR
Press Volume button to select tone control and press
Right Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Dial new value for interrupt times. TRANSFERER TONE:0100

(must be four digits) 9900 0100 9900
Press Right Soft button advances cursor and
press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-170 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate
ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan
is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is
the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.
A RPO(Ring Plan Override) key is not needed as the system will switch automatically;
however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if
needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans
correlate with all MMC’s that program ring or termination destinations and station and
trunk COS.

Use the following example of assigning Ring Plans:

RING PLAN Start Time End Time

(MON: 1) ST: 0000 END: 23:59

(MON: 2) ST: 0800 END: 2200
(MON: 3) ST: 1000 END: 2000
(MON: 4) ST: 1200 END: 1800
(MON: 5) ST: 1300 END: 1600
(MON: 6) ST: 1400 END: 1500

Using a 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the same 24
hour period. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until
the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts the Ring Plan 1 at 00:00. The system will stay
Ring Plan 1 until 08:00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts. As each ring
Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.
If a Ring Plan ends and there are no additional Ring Plans the system will default to the
Ring Plan with time that extends past the expired ring plan time.

CONDITIONS
y When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail Card that only has day/night mode, the
day/night must be set for each RING PLAN at ‘MMC 758 VM DAY/NIGHT’.
y Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence. IE. RP 1, 2, 3, 4 etc.
y A Ring Plan cannot be omitted. IE. RP 1, 2, 5 etc.
y A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time before a lower numbered
Ring Plan

Ring Plan 1
Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan of each day. If no Ring Plan destination is
input the operator group is the default destination.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-171

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
START: NONE
END: NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 507. RING PLAN (SUN:1)
Display shows: ST: END:

2. Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3) RING PLAN (WED:1)

OR ST: END:
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.

3. Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2) RING PLAN (WED:2)

OR ST:_ END:
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.

4. Dial start time.(e.g., 1030) RING PLAN (WED:1)

If valid, cursor moves to end time. ST:1030 END:1800
Enter end time.
If valid, system returns to step 2.
Begin again.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

2-172 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[509] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the
normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.
Dates are entered in a month day format. For example July 4th would be 0704. One ring
plan applies to all holidays.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED
FOLLOW RING PLAN 1

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 509. RING PLAN
Display shows the Ring Plan: FOLLOW 1

2. Press Right Soft button advance cursor. RING PLAN

Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan. FOLLOW 2
OR
Use the dial pad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)

3. Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor. RING PLAN
FOLLOW 2

4. Press Volume button to scroll to Assign Holiday ASSIGN HOLIDAY

and press Right Soft button to advance cursor 01:

5. Press Volume button to select entry and press Right ASSIGN HOLIDAY
Soft button enter and advance cursor 05:

6. Dial date using the dial pad for holiday.(e.g., 0704) ASSIGN HOLIDAY
05:0704

7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-173

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[510] SLI RING CADENCE

Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide
basis. There are 5 cadences available. Please call Technical Support before changing any
cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.

No Item Description

1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.
2 TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.
3 DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.
4 ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.
5 CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
(a unit: milliseconds)
Item ON OFF ON OFF

STN RING 1000 3000 1000 3000

TRK RING 0400 0200 0400 2000
DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000
ALM RING 0400 0200 0400 3000
CBK RING 1000 4000 1000 4000

2-174 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 510. 1:STN RING :0400
Display shows: 0200 0400 3000

2. Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3) 3:DOOR RING:0400

OR 0100 0400 2000
Press Volume button to select, press Left
Soft button and advance to step 3.

3. Dial new value for interrupt times. 3:DOOR RING:0100

(must be four digits) 9900 0100 9900
Press Right Soft button advances cursor.
Press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-175

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps
on phones connected to an MWSLI supported card. There are two main choices for the
MW lamp cadence available, these being continuous and interrupted as described below.

No Item Description

0 INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.
The shortest on time is 100 ms and the longest on time is 3000 ms.
The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.
1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.

CONDITIONS
MWSLI SUPPORTED CARDS ONLY

DEFAULT DATA
INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 511. MW LAMP CADENCE
Display shows: INTERRUPT LED

2. Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE. MW LAMP CADENCE

OR INTERRUPT LED
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

3. Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits) MW LAMP CADENCE

2000 2000
Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-176 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[513] HOTEL TIMER

This MMC is where the check out time for guest rooms and the room clean timers are set.
These are system wide timers that affects all rooms.

No Item Description

0 CHECK OUT TIME If a room is occupied during the checkout time an additional days
room charge will be automatically added to the room bill. If a
room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional days
room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to hold is
how a late check out can be performed.
1 ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied
rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.
2 CHECK IN END TM This time is used to decide an additional days room charge will be
automatically added to the room bill when the first check out time is
reached after check-in.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 513. CHECK OUT TIME
Display shows: HH:MM : :

2. Select the timer using the Volume buttons. ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : :

3. Enter new time using above 24 hour clock ROOM CLEAN TIME
system returns to step 2. HH:MM : 11:30

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-177

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[514] TONE SOURCE

This program is assigned external tone source instead of system tone. There are 7 types of
tone for external tone source.

No Type

0 BUSY TONE
1 DIAL TONE
2 DND TONE
3 TRANSFER TONE
4 MSG WAIT TONE
5 ERROR TONE
6 RINGBACK TONE

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 514. BUSY TONE
Display shows: TONE

2. Enter the system tone number.(0-6) DIAL TONE

OR TONE
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial a number for external tone source. DIAL TONE

OR 372
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-178 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN 1~6: 500

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 600. OPERATOR GROUP
Display shows: 1:500 2:500

2. Dial the ring plan number.(1~6) OPERATOR GROUP

OR 1:500 2:500
Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

3. Dial the group number. OPERATOR GROUP

OR 1:501 2:500
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-179

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[601] SIGN STATION GROUP

This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available
in a M system and 80 for a L system.

The options for setting up these groups are as follows:

No Option Description

0 TYPE This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the
following:
0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can
be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.
1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These
must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot
be entered here. Check all programming in MMC 726 to ensure that
the In band DTMF codes are properly set.
2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two
methods of UCD:
- TYPE 1 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as
an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement
device to play to callers while they are on hold.
Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations.
a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the
announcement with a hook flash and a transfer back to the UCD
group.
b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement.
c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the
announcement in its entirety.
d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a
previous caller is currently connected to the announcement
device.

- TYPE 2 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as
an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been
installed in the system.
The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded
announcements to callers in queue. The first announcement is
played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long
as the caller is in queue.
This type of UCD group has the following advantages:
a) No external device need be installed to provide an
announcement.
b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously.
c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free
UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes
available.

2-180 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Description

0 TYPE d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.

Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC
607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a
system due to availability of system resources.
3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto
Attendant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this.
4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail Card.
When a Built-In Voice Mail Card is installed, group 529 must be
programmed as a BI-VMS group on a M system and group 549 must
be used for a L system. Group 529(or 549) are fixed for BI-VMS use.
If BI-VMS is not installed in the system, group 529(or 549) can be
used as any other group can be used.
5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a
message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this
type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged
station will return the message to the message group so any
member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than
one message group, then any message indications made by that
station would be for the first numerical message group they are a
member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple
station groups.
6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 station for video
conference.
1 RING MODE Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide
how calls are placed to the group.
0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be
called on a first available basis. Calls will first go to the first member,
if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member, if the
second member is busy, calls will go to the third member etc. This
type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls to a
selected individual, with other members only getting the calls when
the first member is busy. The number of members allowed for a
sequential group is 48.
1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second
call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third
member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call
among all group members. The number of members allowed for a
distributed group is 48.
2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members
simultaneously.
This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group
member is busy, they can receive off hook ring if defined in MMC
300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.
The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring
mode.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-181

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Description

2 OVERFLOW This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to
begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has
elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.
3 GROUP This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred
TRANSFER to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall
will take place.
4 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the
OVERFLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW
DESTINATION can be defined as:
1 COMMON BELL There are up to 3 Common bells available on L
system and 1 on M system. Because there is a common bell port on
each MISC card.
2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.
3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be
defined as the NEXT port.
5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 48 members for the
system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to
multiple station groups
6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next
group member.
7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if
all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring
back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy.
Obviously UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when
MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC
BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting.

Calls to a group
Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any stations in the
group.

2-182 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
y A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can normally
accommodate up to 48 members, but only up to 32 members if the RING MODE is
‘UNCONDITIONAL’.
y To enable off-hook ring for calls incoming to busy members, set the OFFHOOK RING
of MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION OFFHOOK RING to ‘ON’. Even
in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is
‘UNCONDITIONAL’.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL GROUP

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 601. [501] STN.GROUP
Display shows: TYPE:NORMAL GRP

2. Dial group number.(e.g., 505) [505] STN.GROUP

OR TYPE:NORMAL GRP
Press Volume button to select group and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0) [505] STN GROUP

OR TYPE:VMAA GROUP
Press Volume button to scroll options and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. DIAL group type.(e.g., 1) [505] STN GROUP

OR TYPE:VMAA GROUP
Press Volume button to make selection and
pess Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.
5. Dial feature option number.0-6, e.g., 1) [505] STN GROUP
OR RING:DISTRIBUTE
Press Volume button to scroll options and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Dial ring option.0-2, e.g., 0) [505] STN GROUP

OR RING:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor
back to RING or press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-183

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

7. Dial next feature option and continue. [505] STN GROUP

OR RING:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL

2-184 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[602] STATION GROUP NAME

Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to identify an
individual station group.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 602. [500] SGR NAME
Display shows:

2. Dial group number.(e.g., 505) [505] SGR NAME

OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter in name using above method and table. [505] SGR NAME
TELECOMS

4. Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 STATION NAME
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-185

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is
very useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several
dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation:(1) sequential and(2) distribute.
There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 99 members per group.

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk
member from other groups to prevent accidental access.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9
ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801
ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803
ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804
ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 603. [9] TRK GROUP
Display shows: MODE:SEQUENTIAL

2. Enter in valid trunk group.(e.g., 9) [9] TRK GROUP

OR MODE:SEQUENTIAL
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Press Right Soft button to change mode. [9] TRK GROUP

OR MEMBER 01:NONE
Press Volume button to change mode to member.

4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number [9] TRK GROUP
of member and enter valid member number MEMBER 05:NONE
(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

2-186 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729) [9] TRK GROUP

OR MEMBER 01:729
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9

if necessary.

7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

VoIP PROGRAMMING
MMC 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE
MMC 833 VoIP IP TABLE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-187

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones.
Each page zone can have up to 99 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one
zone. Page zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members
of page zone 0.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 604. INT.PAGE ZONE(0)
Display shows: MEMBER 01:NONE

2. Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3) INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

OR MEMBER 01:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad. INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

OR MEMBER 05:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad. INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

OR MEMBER 05:205
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-188 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.

The OfficeServ 7200 system must be equipped with a MISC daughter-board to

allow external paging.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 605. EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)
Display shows first page zone: MEMBER 1 :NONE

2. Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6) EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

OR MEMBER 1 :NONE
Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Dial member number.(e.g., 3) EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

OR MEMBER 3 :NONE
Use Volume button to select member numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 above.

4. Dial relay number via dial keypad(e.g., 362) EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. MEMBER 3 :362
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-189

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual
phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to
waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to
use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.

A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can
have up to 500 numbers(950 numbers when MMC 861 SYSTEM SPEED BIN is set to
MAX 950) and each station can have up to 50 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in
blocks of ten. Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS: 1 BLOCKS ASSIGNED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 606. FREE LIST:20
Display shows: SYSTEM:20

2. Press Right Soft button to advance next line. FREE LIST:20

OR SYSTEM:20

You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button. BUSY LIST:180
SYSTEM:20

3. Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume FREE LIST:20

button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. EXT201:1

4. Enter desired extension number via dial keypad. FREE LIST:20

(e.g., 205) EXT205:1
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

2-190 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Enter valid number for bins. FREE LIST:20

(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM) EXT205:5
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 106 STATION SPD NAME
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-191

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[607] UCD OPTIONS

Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already
been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.
(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card
and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When a group overflow timer in
MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card It is here that the caller is played
the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will
continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.

This MMC includes options to select messages to play to a caller. These messages can be
as follows:

Message Description

MESSAGES 01-48 These can be created using the AAREC Soft button(programmed on
phones by using MMC 722 or 723). A total of two minutes of message time
is available and can be divided up into 1 to 48 messages.
MESSAGES 49-64 These are pre-programmed as follows:
49 ‘Thank you for calling, please dial your party’s extension number’.
50 ‘Invalid number, please try again’.
51 ‘I’m sorry, there is no answer’.
52 ‘I’m sorry, that station is busy’.
53 ‘One moment please’.
54 ‘Transferring’.
55 ‘I’ll transfer you’.
56 ‘Good-bye’.
57 ‘Thank you’.
58 ‘Please hold for the operator’.
59 ‘Please hold for assistance’.
60 ‘Thank you, good-bye’.
61 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are presently busy’.
62 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are still busy’.
63 ‘Please call back later’.
64 ‘I’m sorry, not a valid selection’.

2-192 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

The following program options apply:

No Option Description

00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first
message will immediately play. For instructions on how to make
these recordings, see the User Instructions Section, Auto
Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution System Administration.
The default message is #61 ‘I’m sorry, all stations are presently
busy’.

This message will only be played once for the caller.

01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD
Recall), the caller will be played the second message.
For instructions on how to make these recordings, see the User
Instructions Section, Auto Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution
System Administration. The default message is #62 ‘I’m sorry, all
stations are still busy’.

This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in

queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall Timer below.
02 EXIT CODE While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH),
the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be
transferred immediately to the final destination(see Final
Destination). The exit code is optional and does not need to be
used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to
provide instructions on its use.
03 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final
destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the
UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means
that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the
UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller
through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final
destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination
immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or
in DND.

Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy

group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear
the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear
the second message again before being transferred to the final
destination.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-193

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Description

04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a
UCD agent.
This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit
during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final
destination can be a station number, a group number,
a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing
A button plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a
destination of NONE(Hold button).

If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a
FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination
will forward or overflow.
If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will
receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final
destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the
final destination indefinitely.

To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call
buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make
the final destination a group(even if the group has only one
station in it.)
05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.
If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In
the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000,
an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is
answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing
process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in
MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers.
This will simulate a circular hunt group.
06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, he/she will be
placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD
recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the
caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is
00-99. The default is 10.
07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music on Hold source the callers will
be connected to between messages. The choice is either an
external source, AA message defined in MMC 739, or a Built-In
Voice Mail Card message defined in MMC 756.
08 WRAP-UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive
additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to
allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call
before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The
default is 010.

2-194 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Description

09 AUTO LOG OUT This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log
out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.
This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.
10 ALLOUTÆFINAL This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final
destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.
If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will
disconnect.
11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter
an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be
entered in MMC 717.
12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies
whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
FIRST MSG: 61
SECOND MSG: 62
EXIT CODE: NONE
RETRY COUNT: 03
FINAL DEST: 500
RING NEXT: 30 SEC
UCD RECALL: 10 SEC
MOH SOURCE: NONE
WRAP-UP: 10 SEC
AUTO LOG OUT: ON
ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF
AGENT PIN NO: OFF
GBUSY NEXT: OFF

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-195

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 607. [530] UCD OPTION
Display shows: FIRST MSG :61

2. Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial [542] UCD OPTION
group number. FIRST MSG :61
OR
Press Left Soft button to position cursor under [530] UCD OPTION
message number and enter new message. FIRST MSG :25
OR
Press Right Soft button and advance to next option [530] UCD GROUP
using the Volume buttons to select an option. UCD RECALL:10 SEC

3. Press Right Soft button and advance to next option. [530] UCD OPTION
Use the Volume buttons to make a Selection. UCD RECALL:10 SEC
OR
Make a selection using the dial pad.

4. Press Left Soft button to ENTER the selection and [530] UCD OPTION
to return to Step 1. EXIT CODE :NONE
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to Step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP

2-196 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Provides means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on
such items as voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays. The free list will
show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2000 total bins. Each phone
may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 608. [201] REVIEW BLK
Display shows first station: 10:0060 FREE

2. Enter desired EXT number(e.g., 205) [205] REVW BLOCK

OR 10:0060 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 5) [205] REVW BLOCK

OR 50:0010 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-197

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK

Provides means of adding or deleting Call LOG blocks to an individual phone. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as
voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how
many bins are left that be assigned. The system has 2000 total bins. Each phone may be
assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 609. [201] LOG BLOCK
Display shows first station: 10:0070 FREE

2. Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205) [205] LOG BLOCK

OR 10:0070 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 5) [205] LOG BLOCK

OR 50:0030 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-198 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

This program allows you to send a text message to a busy station or during an OHVA.
Up to 100 stations can be set to the system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ITP-5012L sets are automatically set to USED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 611. [201] TMSG STN
Display shows: NOT USED:100 FREE

2. Enter the number of a station. [202] TMSG STN

OR NOT USED:100 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Specify whether text message will be used or not. [202] TMSG STN
USED

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-199

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

This program allows a station to use the Group conference call feature. Up to 100 stations
can be allowed in the system. Each user can have up to 5 pre programmed conferences.
This feature is only for Large LCD Phone(ex: ITP-5012L,DS-5012L. WIP-5000M)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
Large LCD Phone sets are automatically set to USED

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 612. [201] CONF STN
Display shows: NOT USED:100 FREE

2. Enter the number of a station. [202] CONF STN

OR NOT USED :100 FREE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Specify whether a group conference be used [205] CONF STN

or not. USED

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

2-200 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

This program allows you to set a call group in which each station or Trunk line is included.
It is useful if you want to limit a call between stations, outgoing calls through a Trunk line,
or call-pickup.

CONDITIONS
Call group can be set from 001 to 300 for station, and from 301 to 500 for trunk.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: 001
ALL TRUNKS: 301

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 614. STATION GROUP
Display shows first station: 201 :001

2. Enter [0] if you want to set a call group to a station. TRUNK GROUP
Enter [1] if user want to set a call group to a trunk. 701 :301
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Enter a number you want. TRUNK GROUP

OR 702 :301
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter the number of the call group you TRUNK GROUP

want to set. 702 :302
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 318 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-201

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[615] MGI GROUP

This optional program sets designated MGI ports for specific services. This allows
‘grading’ of MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into
groups. Keep in mind that any entries made here can be ineffective,
if conflicting entries exist in MMC616.

No Type Description

0 LOCAL ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a
private IP network
1 PUB IP ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a
public IP network.
2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7200 systems across a
private IP network.
3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7200 systems on a
public IP network
4 VOIP TRUNK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network
5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network
6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications across a private network.
7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications on a public network.
8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP
phones across a private IP network

The MGI ports can be allow two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed.
The members of each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s).

CONDITIONS
NONE

2-202 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA
LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3
MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3
PUB IP MGI3: MGI3
ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 615. USER: LOCAL ITP
Display shows the first available option: MODE:SEQUENTIAL

2. Press Volume button to select an user type. USER: LOCAL ITP

Press Right Soft button to move cursor. MODE:SEQUENTIAL

3. Press Volume button to select an option and USER: LOCAL ITP

press Right Soft button to move cursor. MODE:SEQUENTIAL

4. Press Volume button to select an data and USER: LOCAL ITP

press Right Soft button to store data and MODE:SEQUENTIAL
move cursor to return to Step 1.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-203

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[616] MGI USER

This optional program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port
basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not utilized, allocation of MGI ports will
be controlled by MMC615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk
selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital
stations(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking
trunks(83XX), H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one
assignment per MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in
MMC615.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 616. [3801] MGI USER
Display shows the first available option: NONE

2. Enter MGI dial number. [3801] MGI USER

OR NONE
Press Volume button to select an MGI port and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI user dial number. [3801] MGI USER

OR NONE
Press Volume button to select an MGI user and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-204 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS

This MMC allows the technician to duplicate a class of service to make it easier to have
multiple similar classes of service.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
‘F’ KEY Used to advance MMC 701

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 700. COPY COS ITEMS
Display shows: COS01ÆCOS01

2. Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05) COPY COS ITEMS

OR COS05ÆCOS01
Press Volume button to select COS and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor and advance
to next step.

3. Dial target COS.(e.g., 06) COPY COS ITEMS

OR COS05ÆCOS06
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.

4. Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press COS CONTENTS(06)

Right Soft to advance cursor. TOLL LEVEL:A

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-205

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for
creating a new class of service. If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a
programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call. There
are 30 classes of service available.

This MMC is divided into 5 categories.

No Category Description

0 TOLL LEVEL TOLL LEVEL

0 A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
1 B Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703
2 C Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703
3 D Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703
4 E Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703
5 F Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703
6 G Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703
7 H Follow toll class H(All restricted)
1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description
00 AA CALER YES Auto answer control by
caller
01 ABSENCE YES Absence
02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear
03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy
04 CALLBACK YES Callback
05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon
06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire
07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate
08 CONFER. YES Conference
09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear
10 DIRECT. YES Directory dial
11 DISA YES Allow DISA use
12 DND YES Do Not Disturb
13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb
14 DND OVRD YES Do Not Disturb override
15 DOOR YES Door ring answer
16 DSS YES Direct station select
17 DTS YES Direct trunk select
18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic
record(SVM-800)
19 EXT FWD YES External call forward

2-206 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Category Description

1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description

20 FEATURE YES Transfer button
21 FLASH YES Trunk flash
22 FOLLOW-ME YES Call forward-follow me
23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding
24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM-800
25 GRP I/O YES Group in/out
26 HOLD YES Hold
27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off hook
selection
28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call
30 MESSAGE YES Message
31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page
32 NEW CALL YES New call
33 OHVAED YES Receive Off hook voice
announcement
34 OHVAING YES Make Off hook voice
announcement
35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation
36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator
37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer
38 OVERRIDE NO Barge-In
39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging
40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging
41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging
42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging
43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging
44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging
45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging
46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging
47 PAGE 8 YES Page zone 8 Paging
48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 Paging
49 PAGE * YES Page zone * Paging
51 PICKUP YES Call pickup
52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-207

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Category Description

1 USABLE FEATURES No COS Default Description

53 REM. HOLD YES Remote Hold
54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change
55 SECURE YES Barge-In secure
56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation
57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check
58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock
59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial
60 TRK AREC NO Trunk call automatic
record(SVM-800)
61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold
62 UNCO CNF YES Unsupervised Conference
63 VM AREC NO Auto Record(SVMi)
64 VM AME NO Answer Machine
Emulation(SVMi)
65 VM REC NO Call Record(SVMi)
66 VMS PSWD NO VMS password(SVM-800)
67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record(SVM-800)
2 CALL STATION STN GROUP 01-80 YES Station group 01~80 calling
GROUPS
3 CALL TRUNK TRK GROUP 01-30 YES Trunk group 01~30 calling
GROUPS
4 CALL TO BIVMS STN 01-16 YES SVMi port 01~16 calling
BIVMS STN(SVMi).

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

2-208 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 701. COS CONTENTS(01)
Display shows: TOLL LEVEL:A

2. Dial COS.(e.g., 06) COS CONTENTS(06)

OR TOLL LEVEL:A
Press Volume button to select COS number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial COS contents categories. COS CONTENTS(06)

(e.g., 1 for usable feature) 00:AA CALER :YES
OR
Press Volume button to select COS categories and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12) COS CONTENTS(06)

OR 12:DND :YES
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES. COS CONTENTS(06)

OR 12:DND :NO
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-209

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500
entries allowed in the deny and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each
index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704 Assign Wild
Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used
repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.
There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by
default and toll level H is set as in-house only by default.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to wild card X entered
B Used to wild card Y entered
C Used to wild card Z entered

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702. DENY(001):BCDEFG
Display shows: :000000

2. Dial index number.(e.g., 005) DENY(005):BCDEFG

OR :000000
Press Volume button to select index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 212) DENY(005):BCDEFG

212 :000000
OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and press DENY(005):BCDEFG
Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options. 21X :000000

2-210 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line until DENY(001):BCDEFG

under toll class mark.(e.g., E) 212 :000100
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-211

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 250 allowable
entries in the allow table for a OfficeServ 7200-main system and 500 allowable entries for
a OfficeServ 7200-extended system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of
service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704 Assign
Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. There are six toll levels,
B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set as unrestricted by default, and toll level H
is set as in-house only by default.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to wild card X entered
B Used to wild card Y entered
C Used to wild card Z entered

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702. ALOW(001):BCDEFG
Display shows: :000000

2. Dial index number.(e.g., 005) ALOW(005):BCDEFG

OR :000000
Press Volume button to select index and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202) ALOW(005):BCDEFG

202 :000000
OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and ALOW(005):BCDEFG
press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS 20X :000000
Options.

2-212 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line ALOW(001):BCDEFG

until under toll class mark.(e.g., E) 202 :000100
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-213

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is so
desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table
if needed.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
X ENTRIES SET TO 1
OTHER ENTRIES SET TO 0

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 704. :0123456789*#
Display shows: X:111111111111

2. Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z) :0123456789*#

and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to Z:000000000000
option line.

3. Press Volume button to move cursor to option :0123456789*#

digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other Z:000001000000
digits as required)
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

2-214 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries
available(950 entries when MMC 861 SYSTEM SPEED BIN is set to MAX 950) for
programming(see MMC 606). Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group
access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits
may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access
number, it will automatically insert the separator.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
B Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
F Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)
ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID translation
table.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 705. SYS SPEED DIAL
Display shows: 500:

2. Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505) SYS SPEED DIAL

OR 505:
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter access code(e.g., 9/701) plus the phone SYS SPEED DIAL
number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under) 505:9–121223456789
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter SYS SPEED NAME
name. 505:

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-215

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5. If you want to save the speed dial number and name SYS SPEED DIAL
data to the MMC 728 CID translation table. ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial name must be exist)

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

2-216 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each system speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial
feature. The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial
location by scanning its name.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NO NAMES

PROGRAM BUTTONS
ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728 CID
translation table.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 706. SYS SPEED NAME
Display shows: 500:

2. Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505) SYS SPEED NAME

OR 505:
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter name using dial keypad and above table and SYS SPEED NAME
press Right Soft button to return to step 2. 505:TELECOMS
OR
Press the F key to toggle to speed dial number SYS SPEED DIAL
to return to MMC 705, step 3. 505:

4. If you want to save the speed dial number and name SYS SPEED NAME
data to the MMC 728 CLI translation table. ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial number must be exist)

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-217

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

2-218 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE

Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500
available entries. Authorization codes can be up to 4 to 10 digits.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 707. AUTHOR.CODE(001)
Display shows: C:01

2. Dial code index number.(e.g., 005) AUTHOR.CODE(005)

OR C:01
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and AUTHOR.CODE(005)

a maximum of 10 digits via dial keypad 1234567890 C:01
(e.g., 1234567890)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05) AUTHOR.CODE(005)

OR 1234567890 C:05
Press Volume button to select COS and press Right
Soft button to select and return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-219

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[708] ACCOUNT CODE

Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 708. ACCOUNT CODE
Display shows: 001:

2. Dial code index number.(e.g., 005) ACCOUNT CODE

OR 005:
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via ACCOUNT CODE

dial keypad.(e.g., 1234) 005:1234
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
back to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE

2-220 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

This MMC provides a means to program three trunk code tables as described below.

No Special Code Description

0 PBX CODE This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the
trunk access codes needed for toll restriction to be properly
applied when the system is used either behind a PBX or with
CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied
on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code
entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be applied to
the digits following the trunk access code.
1 SPECIAL CODE This table identifies to the system dialling rules the special
feature codes used to activate central office custom calling
features such as CID Block and call waiting disable. The special
feature codes can be used on a per call basis without affecting
LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of
ten(10) entries available each of which may be up to four digits
long.
2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify to the system
numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass
includes Toll restriction, Trunk access and forced authorization
or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits
long.
3 OVER USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will
access.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-221

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 709. PBX ACCESS CODE
Display shows: 1:

2. Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE or TOLL OVERRIDE

OVRD USE TRK GRP. 1:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter index number.(e.g., 3) TOLL OVERRIDE

OR 3:_
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter via dial keypad the desired access/ TOLL OVERRIDE

feature code.(e.g., 911) 3:911
Press Right Soft button to enter and return
to step 3 and enter more entries.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 305 FORCED CODES

TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

2-222 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE

The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call
placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME
TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 with a digit string
length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in
numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 710. LCR DIGIT (0001)
Display shows: DIGIT:

2. Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005) LCR DIGIT (0005)

OR DIGIT:_
Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and LCR DIGIT (0005)
press Right Soft button. DIGIT:305426
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.

4. Enter digit length.(max: 31) LCR DIGIT (0005)

Cursor will move to RT.(route selection) LENGTH:10 RT:01

5. Enter RT.(01-32) LCR DIGIT (0005)

Valid entry will return you to step 1. LENGTH:10 RT:01

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-223

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[711] LCR TIME TABLE

This table gives the flexibility to the system, through the LCR ROUTES, to allow calls
placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When
LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive
trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time
of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 711. LCR TIME (SUN:A)
Display shows: HHMM: LCRT:-

2. Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED) LCR TIME (WED:A)

OR HHMM: LCRT:-
Press Volume button to make day selection and
press Right Soft button.

3. Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B) LCR TIME (WED:B)

OR HHMM: LCRT:-
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

4. Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800) LCR TIME (WED:B)
Cursor moves to LCRT.(reference MMC 712) HHMM:0800 LCRT:-

5. Dial time table number.(1-4) LCR TIME (WED:B)

OR HHMM:0800 LCRT:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

2-224 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE

The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the
completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT
TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE.
After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a
specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum number of 32 routes available.
If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first
designated trunk group and then starts to utilize succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk
groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they
become available.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 712. LCR ROUTE (01:1)
Display shows: C:1 G:NONE M:---

2. Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05) LCR ROUTE (05:1)

OR C:1 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected table and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2) LCR ROUTE (05:2)

OR C:1 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4) LCR ROUTE (05:2)

OR C:4 G:NONE M:---
Press Volume button to selected COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801) LCR ROUTE (05:2)

OR C:4 G:801 M:---
Press Volume button to selected access code and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-225

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

6. Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050) LCR ROUTE (05:2)

OR C:4 G:801 M:050
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR LCR ROUTE (05:2)
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move C:4 G:801 M:---
cursor to step 2.

7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

2-226 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

This program entry is also referred to as Outgoing dial Rules. This will give the system the
ability to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. A perfect
example is the adding of a digit ‘1’. An advantage is to insert a common carrier network
access code of 1010288. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over
a local line utilizing the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be
entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.

Option Maximum Number Of Digit Entries

Number of digits to delete 15

Insert(before dialling string) 14
Append(after dialling string) 14

DIGIT STRING KEY

Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 713. LCR MODIFY (001)
Display shows: NOF DEL DGT:00

2. Enter index number.(e.g., 005) LCR MODIFY (005)

OR NOF DEL DGT:00
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter number of digits to delete. LCR MODIFY (005)

OR NOF DEL DGT:01
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to next step.

4. Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288) LCR MODIFY (005)

OR I:10288_
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and advance to next step.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-227

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5. Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678) LCR MODIFY (005)

OR A:_
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE

2-228 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call
waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is
also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed
on hold. An 11 character name can be added to the number. There are a maximum of 999
entries. If there is no matching number on DID service the call is routed to the operator
group.

Definitions of option are as follows:

Option Description

DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line Up to 16 digits may be entered.

MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear in regards to
that DID/DNIS number if the call is placed on hold. There are a total of 6
possible music selections(see below).
RING PLAN
1: XXX, 2: XXX, ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a
3: XXX, 4: XXX, station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If trunk or trunk group is
5: XXX, 6: XXX selected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the
received digits to be re-sent on the facility(s). This is referred to as DID
Repeat digits over tie line.
An entry of the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.
CW Call waiting Yes/No . Allow a second DID call to be received
MC The number of maximum call count. When this sets 99, this feature will not
works. When this sets 0, if a call comes that matched DID digits and DGT field
then the system will be reject call. When this sets between 1 to 98, if a call
comes that matched DID digits and DGT field then the system counts same DID
digits call, and in case of the count is same or higher than this value, the system
sends busy signal to caller.
DC The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching,
mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum
number of digits that can be deleted is 16.
DELETE
NAME Input up to 11 characters to identify call.
Refer to ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’ for descriptions on INPUT
CHARACTERS.

CONDITIONS
If an E & M line is designated as FOLLOW DID TRANS at ‘MMC 416 ASSIGN E &
M/DID RINGDOWN’, calls are terminated according to the station direct dial translation
table of ‘MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION’.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-229

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME

001 2*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

002 3*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
003 5*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE
004 8*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 714. DID DIGIT (001)
Display shows: DGT:

2. Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad. DID DIGIT (005)
OR DGT:
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial DID DIGIT (005)

keypad and press Right Soft button to move DGT:5065
Cursor.

4. Enter the MOH source for this entry. DID DIGIT (005)
OR MOH:NONE PRI:NO
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.

5. Enter priority level via dial keypad. DID DIGIT (005)

(1-9 or NO) MOH:NONE PRI:NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft buttons to advance next step.

6. Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan DID DIGIT (005)
destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530) 1:530 2:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.

7. Enter call wait option via dial keypad. DID DIGIT (005)
(1 for YES, 0 for NO) CW:N MC:99 DC:0
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.

2-230 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

8. Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99) DID DIGIT (005)
OR CW:N MC:99 DC:0
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.

9. Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16) DID DIGIT (005)
OR CW:N MC:99 DC:0
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance next step.

10. Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right DID DIGIT (005)
Soft button to return to Step 1. NAME:

11. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to ‘RELATED ITEMS’ of MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-231

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[715] ROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

There are 15 messages in the system.

MESSAGES 01-10 are 16 character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can
be changed.
MESSAGES 11-15 are 16 character blank messages that can be created.

DEFAULT DATA
TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES AS DETAILED BELOW

01. IN A MEETING
02. OUT ON A CALL
03. OUT TO LUNCH
04. LEAVE A MESSAGE
05. PAGE ME
06. OUT OF TOWN
07. IN TOMORROW
08. RETURN AFTERNOON
09. ON VACATION
10. GONE HOME

2-232 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 715. PGM.MESSAGE (01)
Display shows: IN A MEETING

2. Enter index number.(e.g., 11) PGM.MESSAGE (11)

OR _Blank Message
Press Volume button arrow to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter message via dial keypad using the above PGM.MESSAGE (11)
Table.(maximum 16 characters) SunBathing
Use A button to toggle upper case/lower case.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-233

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[717] UCD AGENT ID

This MMC defines UCD agent ID number or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log
UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 300 available entries on OfficeServ 7200-
extended system and 100 available entries on OfficeServ 7200-main system. Each entry is
tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 717. AGENT PIN (001)
Display shows: ID: GRP:NONE

2. Dial code index number.(e.g., 005) AGENT PIN (005)

OR ID:_ GRP:NONE
Press Volume buttons to select index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and AGENT PIN (005)
press Right Soft button to move cursor. ID:1234 GRP:NONE

4. Enter group number.(e.g., 505) AGENT PIN (005)

OR ID:1234 GRP:505
Press Volume button to select group and
press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-234 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[718] MY AREA CODE

This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for
caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes
the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 718. MY AREA CODE
Display shows: AREA :

2. Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA. MY AREA CODE

OR AREA :
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial MY AREA CODE

keypad(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to AREA :2
move cursor back to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to ‘RELATED ITEMS’ in ‘MMC 411 ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE’

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-235

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[719] IDLE DISPLAY

This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Use dial buttons to enter guidance data in English. Press a dial to display characters below
on LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial. Press another dial to save the
displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press [A] to change
uppercase/lowercase input modes.

Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 719. IDLE DISPLAY (01)
Display shows:

2. Press the location of the line of a large LCD IDLE DISPLAY (02)
phone(01~12) on which guidance data is to be
displayed.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press IDLE DISPLAY (02)
Right Soft button to save and move to step 2. WELCOME TO ABC

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

2-236 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a tool for duplicating key assignment from one phone to another.
This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations.
One limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type(e.g., same
number of buttons).

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 720. [201] COPY KEY
Display shows: FROM:NONE

2. Enter the station number to copy.(e.g., 205) [205] COPY KEY

OR FROM:NONE
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for select all station.

3. Enter station number to copy from(e.g., 203) [205] COPY KEY

and cursor returns to step 2. FROM:203
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-237

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Provides a service tool which will minimize the accidental loss of programmable buttons
on the phones. The method of operation is simple, first the data is saved and then the
station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other
features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the
individual station, providing the same type is in place.

CONDITIONS
This program uses carefully. Because key programming data save to common key
programming database. When new phone connect, system copy from common key
programming database to new phone key programming database.

DEFAULT DATA
RESTORE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 721. [201] SAVE KEY
Display shows: RESTORE

2. Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205) [205] SAVE KEY

OR RESTORE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

3. Press Volume button to make function selection [205] SAVE KEY

and press Right Soft button to enter and return to SAVE
step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

2-238 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific electronic phones, AOM, or
64 button module on the system. For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by
default. For AOM’s and 64 button DSS box’s all buttons are set as DS keys by default.
Features are entered via dial pad keys by pressing the dial pad number the required number
of steps to select the feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times.
If the BOSS key is required, press 2 for the first letter B and then use the Volume button to
change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD

DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG
DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND
DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL
DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

Programmable button Assignments:

Feature Description Feature Description

AAPLAY AUTO ATTENDANT PLAY(Requires MMPG MEET ME PAGE

AA card)
AAREC AUTO ATTENDANT MS MANUAL
RECORD(Requires AA card) SIGNALING
AB ABSENCE MSG MESSAGE
ABAND ABANDONED CALL MUTE MUTE
ABW AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP MW MESSAGE WAIT
ACC ACCOUNT NEW NEW CALL
ALARM ALARM NIGHT NIGHT
AN/RLS ANSWER/RELEASE NND NAME NUMBER
DATE
BARGE BARGE-IN NOCLIP NO CID SEND
BILL BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel NPG NETWORK
Features) PAGE
BLOCK OHVA BLOCK NS NETWORK
STATION

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-239

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Feature Description Feature Description

BOOTH BOOTH(Related to NXT CID NEXT

Hotel/Motel Features)
BOSS BOSS/SECRETARY OHVA OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY OPER OPERATOR
CALL CALL BUTTON PAGE PAGE
CAMP STATION CAMP-ON PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL PARK CALL PARK ORBIT
CBK CALLBACK PAUSE PAUSE
CC CALL COVERAGE PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
CHIN CHECK IN(Related to PRB PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE
Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOUT CHECK OUT(Related to PROG SET PROGRAM
Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOICE CHOICE PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT
(Related to News Server)
CID CALLER ID RB ROOM BILL
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CONF CONFERENCE REJECT OHVA REJECT
CONP CONNECTED NAME RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
DISPLAY
CR CALL RECORD REVW REVIEW
(Requires SVMi card)
CREDIT CREDIT(Related to RP RING PLAN
Hotel/Motel Features)
CS CALL STATUS RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER RTO RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
REDIAL
DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB
REMOTE STATION
DICT DICTATION SETMG SET MESSAGE W/O RING
DIR DIRECTORY SG STATION GROUP
DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR
TO SECRETARY (Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
DLOCK DOOR LOCK SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
DNDO DO NOT DISTURB SP UCD SUPERVISOR
OVERRIDE
DP DIRECT PICKUP SPD SPEED DIAL

2-240 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Feature Description Feature Description

DROP CALL DROP SPKR SPEAKER

DS DSS KEY STATE SET EXECUTIVE STATE
DT DTS KEY STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER
EP ESTABLISHED CALL SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS
PICKUP
EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC TG TRUNK GROUP
FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER TIMER TIMER
FLASH FLASH TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT
FWRD CALL FORWARD TRSF TRANSFER
GCONF GROUP CONFERENCE UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER
GPIK GROUP PICKUP VDIAL VOICE DIAL(Requires VDIAL card)
HDSET HEADSET MODE VG VMS GROUP MESSAGE
(Requires SVM-800)
HLDPK HOLD PICKUP VM VOICE MAIL MEMO
(Requires SVMi card)
HOLD HOLD VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
(Requires SVMi card)
HOTEL HOTEL(Related to VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION
Hotel/Motel Features) (Requires SVMi card)
IG IN/OUT GROUP VMMSG VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY
(Requires SVMi card)
INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY VMSCMT VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM)
(Requires News/Call Plus)
INQIRE INQUIRE VMSMSG VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM)
ISPY CID SPY VMSOUT VMS OUT CALL(Requires SVM)
LANREQ LAN REQUEST VMSREC VMS RECORD(Requires SVM)
LCR LEAST COST ROUTING VMSVAC VMS VACANT(Requires SVM)
LISTN GROUP LISTENING VREC VOICE RECORD(Requires VDIAL
card)
LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER
LOG CALL LOGGING WAKEUP WAKE UP(Related to Hotel/Motel
Features)
MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN
(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-241

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
<24 Button Digital Phone>

CALL1
CALL1 CALL2
CALL1 DT701
CALL1 DT702
CALL1 DT703
CALL1 DT704
CALL1

DT705
CALL1 DT706
CALL1 DT7017
CALL1 DT708
CALL1 DT709
CALL1 DT7010
CALL1

DT711
CALL1 DT712
CALL1 DT713
CALL1 DT714
CALL1 DT715
CALL1 DT716
CALL1

CONF
CALL1 SPD
CALL1 NONE
CALL1 PAGE
CALL1 CBK
CALL1 GPIK01
CALL1

＜48 Button AOM＞

DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1 DS
CALL1

2-242 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 722. [201] KEY (MAST)
Display shows: 01:CALL1Æ

2. Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205) [205] KEY (MAST)

OR 01:CALL1Æ
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18) [201] KEY (MAST)

OR 18:NONEÆ_
Press Volume button to select key number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Using above chart, press dial pad key number to [201] KEY PROG.
make selection. 18:NONEÆGPIK_
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to
enter extender if required or to return to step 2.

5. If required, enter extender.(e.g.,03) [201] KEY PROG.

OR 18:NONEÆGPIK03
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-243

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

This MMC is much like MMC 722, Station Key Programming. The main difference is that
this MMC is system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the
dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.

TYPE OF PHONE

No Type of Phone Description

00 24 BTN SETS Phone with 24 program buttons

01 12 BTN SETS Phone with 12 program buttons
02 US 7B SETS US phone with 7 program buttons
03 EU 6B SETS EU phone with 6 program buttons
04 32 BTN AOMS AOM with 32 program buttons
05 40-64B AOMS AOM with 40-64 program buttons
06 20 BTN SETS Phone with 20 program buttons
07 28 BTN SETS Phone with 28 program buttons
08 18 BTN SETS Phone with 18 program buttons
09 8 BTN SETS Phone with 8 program buttons
10 99 BTN SETS Phone with 99 program buttons
11 38 BTN SETS Phone with 38 program buttons
12 21 BTN SETS Phone with 21 program buttons
13 14 BTN SETS Phone with 14 program buttons

DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 AAPLAY BARGE CAD

DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG
DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SETDND
DIAL 8 TG UA VDIAL
DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP

See Programmable button Assignments on MMC 722.

2-244 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DEFAULT DATA ON MMC 722

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 723. TYPE:24 BTN SETS
Display shows: 01:CALL1Æ

2. Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1) TYPE:12 BTN SETS

OR 01:CALL1Æ
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

3. Enter key number.(e.g., 03) TYPE:12 BTN SETS

OR 03:NONEÆ
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Using table above, press dial keypad number to TYPE:12 BTN SETS
make selection. 03:NONEÆGPIK
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step
5 to enter extender, if required.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

5. If required, enter extender.(e.g.,03) TYPE:12 BTN SETS

OR 03:GPIKÆGPIK03
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-245

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station
groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with a
default three or four digit numbering for station, station groups and trunk numbers
depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP2 card. There is an error
message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature
access code.

No Type of Dial No Description

00 STN DIAL NO. This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx
01 TRK DIAL NO. This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx
02 AA/VD DIAL NO This is where AA port or Voice Dial port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: AA ports: 3951-39xx
VD ports: 3981-398x
03 MISC DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the
alarm sensor are changed or assigned.
Default: Internal CHIME: 371
Internal MODEM: 3999
External MOH: 372-377
External PAGE & Relay: 361-369
Common Bell Relay: 3991-3993
Loud Bell Relay: 3995-3997
04 STNG DIAL This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.
NUMBER Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx
05 TRKG DIAL This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.
NUMBER Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-828
06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned.
Dialling codes are entered via the dial pad key by pressing the dial
pad number the required steps to select the feature. For example,
for OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.
NOTE) Please remember that this program is system-wide.
07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports mapping
terminal number.
Default: 8701-8748
08 DECT STN DIAL NO This is where directory numbers for DECT terminals.
Default: 8801-8899
09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered in the case
when two or more OfficeServ 7200 system are networked together.
Default: NONE

2-246 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Type of Dial No Description

10 VIRT EXT DIAL NO This is where virtual station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: SLT: 3501-3546, DGP: 3401-3480
11 MGI DIAL NO. This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default: 3801-38xx
12 IP STN DIAL NO. This is where IP-based station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 3201-3299(DESKTOP PHONE), 3301-
3399(MOBILE PHONE)
14 VOIP NET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP
networking trunk signaling port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 8301-8380
15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signaling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8401-8480
16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signaling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8501-8580
18 UMS DIAL NUMBER This is where IP UMS port directory numbers are
changed or assigned
19 SIP STN DIAL NUMBER This is where VOIP SIP station port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.

FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD

COUNT 1 2 3 4

DIAL 2 ABAND BARGE CAMP

DIAL 3 DGPALM DGPALM FAUTO
DIAL 4 GCONF HDSET IG
DIAL 5 LCR LCR LCR
DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA
DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB SELFID
DIAL 8 UA UA VDIAL
DIAL 9 WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP WAKEUP

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-247

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Feature Code Assignments and Default

Feature Default Description

ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL

ABS NONE ABSENCE
ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP
ACCT 47 ACCOUNT
ALLCLR NONE ALL CLEAR
ALMCLR 57 ALARM
AUTH NONE AUTHORIZATION CODE
BARGE NONE BARGE-IN
BILL NONE BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK
BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY
CAMP 45 STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK 44 CALLBACK
CHIN NONE CHECK IN(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
CHOICE NONE CHOICE(Related to News Server)
CONF 46 CONFERENCE
CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CR NONE CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card)
CREDIT NONE CREDIT(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION
DICT NONE DICTATION
DIR NONE DIRECTORY
DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP
DISALM 58 DISA ALARM CLEAR
DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY
DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK
DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB
DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH 49 FLASH
FWD 60 CALL FORWARD
GCONF NONE GROUP CONFERENCE
GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP

2-248 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Feature Default Description

HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE

HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP
HOLD 11 HOLD
HOTEL NONE HOTEL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
IG 53 IN/OUT GROUP
INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)
LCR NONE LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING
LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL
LOG NONE CALL LOGGING
MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE
MSG 43 MESSAGE
MYGRPK * MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP
NEW NONE NEW CALL
NIGHT NONE NIGHT
NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND
NPAGE NONE NETWORK PAGE
OHVA NONE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPER 0 OPERATOR
PAGE 55 PAGE
PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD
PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT
PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT
RB NONE ROOM BILL(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT
RP NONE RING PLAN
RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
SELFID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID
SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
SLTALM EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION
SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-249

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Feature Default Description

SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL
SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION
STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE
UA 67 UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VDIAL 681 VOICE DIAL(Requires VDIAL card)
VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card)
VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card)
VMMEMO # VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card)
VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card)
VMSCMT NONE VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800)
VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800)
VMSOUT NONE VMS OUT CALL(Requires SVM -800)
VMSREC NONE VMS RECORD(Requires SVM -800)
VMSVAC NONE VMS VACANT(Requires SVM -800)
VREC 682 VOICE RECORD(Requires VDIAL card)
WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP(Related to Hotel/Motel Features)
WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
FEATURE CODES ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

2-250 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 724. STN DIAL NUM:C1
Display shows: S2-P01:201Æ

2. Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06) FEAT DIAL NUMBER

OR ABAND :64Æ_
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

3. Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7) FEAT NUMBER PLAN

AND PAGE :55Æ
Press Volume button to make selection then press FEAT NUMBER PLAN
Right Soft button to advance cursor. PARK :NONEÆ_

4. Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad. FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONEÆ63

5. Press Right Soft button to enter change and FEAT NUMBER PLAN
continue to make changes. PARK :NONEÆ63

If an error message appears indicating duplication SAME DIAL EXIST

of access code, enter 1 for YES for CHANGE? Y:1,N:0
change or enter 0 for NO for no change.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-251

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[725] SMDR OPTIONS

Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report. The
following options may be selected to print on SMDR:

No Option Default Description

00 PAGE HEADER YES This option determines whether a page header will print
at the top of each page. This would normally be turned
off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.
01 LINE PER PAGE 60 This option selects the length of each page to determine
when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines
may be in the range 01-99.
02 INCOMING CALL NO This option determines whether incoming calls will print
on SMDR.
03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print
on SMDR.
04 AUTHORIZE NO This option determines whether authorization codes will
CODE print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, system make
AUTH field to ‘****’ on SMDR.
05 SMDR START YES This option determines whether valid calls will include
TIME the minimum call time in total call duration.
06 IN/OUT GROUP NO This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT
GROUP, to be printed in the digits dialled column each
time a station enters or leaves a group.
07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to
be printed in the digits dialled column each time a
station enters or leaves DND.
08 WAKE-UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an
alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.
09 DIRECTORY NONE This option allows the system administrator to enter a
NAME 16 character name which will appear on the SMDR
header.
10 CALLER ID DATA NO This option can be selected to print Caller ID data
received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132 column(wide carriage)
printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print.
11 ABANDON CALL NO If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which
CID information was received will print on SMDR.
13 NO. OF DIAL 0 If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last
MASK digits of the number dialled field will be masked as
asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked
digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.

2-252 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Default Description

15 INCOMING NO If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing

ANSWER before answered will print on SMDR.
16 INTERCOM CALL NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print
on SMDR.
17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show
programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and
MMC 800.
20 HOTEL PAGE END This option determines where the page feed is inserted
FEED on HM REPT.(Hotel/Model Enabled Only)
21 HOTEL START 0 This option determines that the number of empty lines
LINE per each page on HM REPT.(Hotel/Model Enabled
Only)
23 DID NUM/NAME YES If this option is set to YES, received DID information will
print on SMDR.
24 ITP NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show IP-based
REGISTRATION station to system connect and disconnect.
25 SET NO If set to YES then the SMDR record will show set
RELOCATION relocated information.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-253

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 725. PAGE HEADER
Display shows: PRINT: YES

2. Dial the option number.(e.g., 01) LINE PER PAGE

OR 60 LINE/PAGE
Use the Volume buttons to scroll through
the options and press Right Soft button
to select an option.

3. Enter the option data. LINE PER PAGE

OR 50 LINE/PAGE

Use the Volume buttons to press Right LINE PER PAGE

Soft button to save the data and return to step 2. 50 LINE/PAGE

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

2-254 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[726] VM/AA OPTIONS

This MMC is used to define all the in band DTMF codes sent to voice mail ports. These in
band codes can be 0-9, A, B or C, and performed two functions.

CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION

This is a DTMF signaling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port answers
a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is receiving and
where the call is coming from. e.g., call has forwarded from extension 225

CALL PROGRESS TONES

These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of the
call. e.g., ring back, busy or disconnect.
Most Voice Mail systems can utilize DTMF in band signaling for more efficient call
processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the type
of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.

CALL and TYPE INFORMATION

The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows:
[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2]

an example of this would be

[FORWARD ALL] from [225] on trunk [703]

Each field can be programmed individually as follows:

Field Description Default

EXTENSION If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers No
FOR DN1 a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a
station is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send station data in the DN1 field.
TRUNK FOR DN1 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers No
a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a
trunk is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN1 field.
EXTENSION If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers No
FOR DN2 a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the
originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send station data in the DN2 field.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-255

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Field Description Default

TRUNK FOR DN2 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers No
a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the
originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers
a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field
SEPARATOR When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent No
between DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine
where DN 1 stops and where DN 2 starts. The separator can be
DTMF 0 through 9, *, #, A, B or C.
DISCONNECT This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a C
SIGNAL disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.
CALLER ID If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers No
NUMBER a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the
VMAA port.
CALL TYPE ID This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string
and can identify any of the following call types
No Call Type Description Default
0 DIRECT A call originating directly from another *
CALL station in the system.
1 ALL FWD This indicates that a call was forwarded to #
CALL the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD ALL set.
2 BSY FWD This indicates that a call was forwarded to #
CALL the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD BUSY set.
3 NOA FWD This indicates that a call was forwarded to #
CALL the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD NO ANSWER set.
4 RECALL A call is recalling the VM/AA port after #
being transferred and not answered.
5 DIR TRK A Trunk Line call has gone directly to *
CALL VM/AA
(e.g., trunk 717 DIL to VM/AA).
6 OVERFLOW A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA #
port from a station group.
7 DID CALL A DID call has called the VM/AA port. B
8 MESSAGE A message button or message reply *
CALL feature code has been used to call the
VM/AA port.

2-256 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

Field Description Default

PROGRESS These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place
TONE ID of regular progress tones. For example, when a VMAA port goes
off hook to originate or transfer a call, instead of hearing normal
dial tone, it will hear DTMF ‘BA’. Progress tones can greatly
increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier
and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy, ring back or DND tone.
Progress tones can identify any of the following.
No Call Type Description Default
0 DIAL TONE Dial Tone BA
1 BUSY TONE Busy Tone 4
2 RINGBAK Ringback Tone 5
TONE
3 DND NO DND or No More Call Button Error 6
MORE
4 HDSET Off Hook Answer 3
ANSWER
5 SPKER On Hook Answer 2
ANSWER

GENERAL RULES
1. 201 is talking to a trunk and presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the
station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers. When this happens, if 201
presses TRANSFER again to return to the trunk, the VM/AA port is not on hold. It is
disconnected.

2. A VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station. When the station returns the
message, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the one that
left the message.

3. A VM/AA port leaves a message for a station. When the station returns the message,
the MESSAGE LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA system turns on the
MESSAGE LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.

4. If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call progress
tones.

5. When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE
ANNOUNCE mode, the phone will be forced to ring.

6. All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence, not intercom
ring cadence.

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-257

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION (IN BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)

In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated. X is
the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not used.

A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group:

[*] + [701] + [ ]+[ ]

In the above example, if Trunk Line information is not used:

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is used)

DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station(205):

[#] + [205] + [X] + [701]

In the above example, if forward information is not used:

[ ] + [205] + [X] + [701]

In the above example, if forward and DN2/Trunk Line information is not used:
[ ] + [205] + [ ]+[ ]

DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA:

[#] + [501] + [x] + [701]

In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A DID call rings the VM/AA directly:

[B] + [9999] + [ ]+[ ]
9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line

In the above example, if did information is turned off:

[ ] + [9999] + [ ]+[ ]

A station transfers(blind or screened) a call(Trunk Line, DID or intercom) to VM/AA group

or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer):
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a station(225) that is Call Forward All to
a VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer) and the
VM/AA group or port answers:
[#] + [225] + [x] + [702]

A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a group(501) that overflows to a VM/AA

group or port:
[#] + [501] + [X] + [702]

2-258 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(205) calls a VM/AA port or group:

[4] + [205] + [ ]+[ ]

In the above example, if direct information is turned off:

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A station(205) calls using MESSAGE key:

[4] + [205] + [ ]+[ ]

In the above example, if message information is turned off:

[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

A call(702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group:

[#] + [225] + [x] + [702]

In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off:
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY

PROGRAM BUTTONS
A Used to input alpha character ‘A’
B Used to insert alpha character ‘B’
C Used to insert alpha character ‘C’

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. 2-259

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 726. EXT FOR DN1
Display shows: YES

2. Enter the OPTION number from the above list. TRK FOR DN2
(e.g., 3) NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO. TRK FOR DN2

OR YES
Press Volume button for selection and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

2-260 © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the
central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match
between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.

The translation table consists of 1000 entries for a OfficeServ 7200-main system and 2000
for a OfficeServ 7200-extended system. Each entry is comprised of a ten-digit(14 digits
allowed) telephone number and a 16-digit name.

CONDITIONS
NONE

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 728. TRANSLATIO(0001)
Display shows first entry DGT:

2. Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005) TRANSLATIO(0005)

OR DGT:_
Use Volume button to scroll through entries
and press Right Soft button to select entry.

3. Enter telephone number and press Right Soft TRANSLATIO(0005)

button to advance name entry. DGT:3054264100
OR
Enter telephone number and press Let Soft
button to return to step 2.

4. Enter associated name as described above TRANSLATIO(0005)

and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. SAMSUNG TELECOM

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CID
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[748] COSTING DIAL PLAN

The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled
number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in
three fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.

DIGITS
Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to ten digits. These are the entries
that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call.
This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the
table that match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING
DIAL PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because
1308 and 1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician
or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical
order.

Wild cards(∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Character
assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries
are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.

DIAL PLAN
This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8).
This pattern is used by MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing
according to MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks
MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.

EXAMPLES
When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to
find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, 1305
is the closest match and this entry will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC
contains entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials
another digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will
be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6,
the 13 entry is the closest match.

Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because
this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after
exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is
found, it will check 18∗∗.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 748. COST DP (001)
Display shows:. DIGIT:

2. Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005) COST DP (005)

OR DIGIT:
Press Volume button to select entry and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digit string via the dial keypad and COST DP (005)
press Right Soft button. DIGIT:1305

4. Enter DIAL PLAN(1-8). COST DP (005)

OR CALL RATE: NONE
Press Volume button to select dial plan and
press Right Soft button to save and move step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433 COST RATE
MMC 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[749] RATE CALCULATION TABLE

The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST
RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.
There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.

No Type Description

0 FIRST INTERVAL This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a
DURATION fixed cost is applied. The range is from 0 to 999 seconds, for
example, 180 seconds(three minutes).
1 FIRST INTERVAL This is the dollar cost for the first interval duration.
COST The range is from 0 to 999, for example, 345($3.45).
2 SECOND INTERVAL This is the amount of time for the duration of each billing increment
DURATION after the first interval has expired. The range is from 0 to 999
seconds, for example, 006 seconds(six seconds).
3 SECOND INTERVAL This is the dollar cost for each billing increment. The range is from
COST 0 to 999, for example 100($1.00).
4 SURCHARGE This is a one-time charge that is applied to the call over and above
the time charges. The range is from 0 to 999, for example
150($1.50).

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL COST RATES NO DATA

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 749. COST RATE (1)
Display shows:. 1ST DUR :000 SEC

2. Dial COST RATE number.(1-8, e.g., 3) COST RATE (3)

OR 1ST DUR :000 SEC
Press Volume button to select COST RATE and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial option number.(0-4, e.g., 1) COST RATE (3)

OR 1ST COST:000
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125: $1.25) COST RATE (3)
OR 1ST COST:125
Press Volume button to select data and press
Right Soft button to save and move step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433 TRUNK COST RATE
MMC 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[750] VM CARD RESTART

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug In Voice Mail Card.

There are three options available in this MMC:

No Option Description

0 DOWNLOAD When the Built-In Voice Mail card starts, part of the power up
procedure will download data from the system to determine time,
date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This
must be done at least once, but once done this download feature
can be turned NO to save boot up time.
1 CARD RESTART If this option is set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail card will
immediately restart according to the download OPTION specified
above.
2 VIRTUAL NUMBER This option is determine which type virtual port include during
DOWNLOAD mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.
The virtual port type are followed:
No Type Description
0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number
1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP-based phone number
2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number
3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP-based mobile phone
number
4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number
5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number
6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H.323 trunk number
7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number
8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking

Remove Built-In Voice Mail Card

If during any test procedures you need to run the system with a default database
and power up with this MMC option set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail database
will be overwritten according to the data in MMC 751 and the default numbering
plan. If you plan this type of test, remove Built-In Voice Mail Card until the
procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded.

CONDITIONS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA
ALL OPTIONS ARE NO

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 750. VM CARD RESTART
Display shows:. DOWNLOAD ? NO

2. Dial 0,1 or 2 to set option and advance. VM CARD RESTART

OR CARD RESTART?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

3. Dial 0(No) or 1(Yes) to confirm selection. VM CARD RESTART

OR ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card. It assigns each station or
group as having a mailbox(yes or no). When stations or groups are flagged as YES, during
Voice Mail card power up mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a
‘YES’ entry.

Once the Voice Mail database has been created new boxes can be added.
a) Through Voice Mail administration,
b) By adding a new mailbox in this system and cycling system power.

If a mailbox is to be removed it must be done through Voice Mail administration.

If a station that do not have an associated voice mailbox, call the Voice Mail system they
will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.

CONDITIONS
Mailboxes that are needed for people that do not have an extension must be added through
Voice Mail programming.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: YES
ALL GROUPS: NO

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 751. ASSIGN MAIL BOX
Display shows:. [201] YES

2. Dial station number. ASSIGN MAIL BOX

OR [202] YES
Press Volume button to scroll the number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES. ASSIGN MAIL BOX

OR [202] NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move stop 2.
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[752] AUTO RECORD

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.

Some specific station in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record
conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming or
outgoing) can be recorded.

When this option is selected a specific port can be assigned for each station set to automatic
conversation recording or the effectiveness of this feature cannot be guaranteed.

In this MMC you can assign:

y Station number: Which station use this feature.
y Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversation are recorded in.
y I, O or B: What type of conversations are recorded, in, out or both.
y Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.

A maximum of 8 stations can this feature in the system.

The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result
in an error message.

When using the auto record feature

CONDITIONS
When a Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail
group defined in MMC 601.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 752. AUTO RECORD
Display shows:. STN:201 MB:NONE

2. Dial station number via dial keypad. AUTO RECORD

OR STN:201 MB:NONE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial mailbox number via dial keypad. AUTO RECORD

OR STN:201 MB:201
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Dial VM number via dial keypad. AUTO RECORD

OR PORT:209 CALL:I
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B) AUTO RECORD

OR PORT:209 CALL:B
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

6. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[753] WARNING DESTINATION

This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the Voice Mail card, if
the Voice Mail card is removed or is offline.
In addition any calls that are forwarded to the Voice Mail card will not forward, they will
remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered.
This destination can be a station number or a group number.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
5000

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 753. WARNING DEST.
Display shows:. DEST:500

2. Dial station number or group number. WARNING DEST.

OR DEST:501
Press Volume button to scroll the number.

3. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[757] VM IN/OUT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Plug in Voice Mail Card.
This MMC is used to assign each Voice Mail Port as used for incoming, outgoing or both
way calls. Note that this MMC must support outgoing calls if off premises
notification(beeper, outbound follow me of outbound notification) is used.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
IN/OUT

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 757. VM IN/OUT
Display shows: 209 : IN/OUT

2. Dial VM number. VM IN/OUT

OR 215 : IN/OUT
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter In or Out via dial keypad. VM IN/OUT

OR 215 : IN
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail Card.
Built-In Voice Mail Card can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode.
This mode will determine what main menu greetings and options are played to the callers.
This operating mode can change automatically(if enabled in Built-In Voice Mail Card)
according to the setting in this MMC.
This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: DAY

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 758. VM DAY/NIGHT
Display shows: RING 1 : DAY

2. Enter ring plan number. VM DAY/NIGHT

OR RING 3 : DAY
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0 for day or 1 for night. VM DAY/NIGHT

OR RING 3 : DAY
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[760] ITEM COST TABLE

This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10 character
name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00
reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and
items 89 to 99 are reserved for other PMS stream items.
These item codes with the exception of codes 93 to 99 will appear on the guests bill at
checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when
printed will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field
will show the number dialled. In addition to the name up to 8 of the tax codes or rates
defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.

PRE DEFINED CODES

No Code Description

Room Deposit This is the code used for pre pay room deposits.
01 Phone Deposit This is the code used for pre pay phone deposits
02-88 - User Assignable Code
89 W/UP SET A wake up call was set
90 W/UP ANS A wake up call was answered
91 W/UP N/ANS A wake up call was not answered
92 W/UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled
93 Check In A guest has checked into a room
94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room
95 Available A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE
96 Occupied A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED
97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING
98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE
99 Hold A room has been flagged as HOLD

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA
NO ENTRIES

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 760. ITEM CODE (00)
Display shows: NAME:RM Deposit

2. Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial ITEM CODE (02)
Keypad. NAME:
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter in item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via ITEM CODE (02)

keypad using the method described above. NAME:CLASS A
4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax ITEM CODE (02)
entry step. TAXES:00000000

5. Enter in the tax rates in MMC 761 that apply to this ITEM CODE (02)
item and press Right Soft button to return to TAXES:11000000
step 2.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[761] TAX RATE SETUP

This MMC allows the technician to set up the 8 tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate
may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition a 10
character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The Various options are
further detailed below.

Option Description

TAX RATE This is the number assigned to this tax rate. The tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to
match the rate field in MMC 760 counting from left to right.
TYPE This is the type of tax and defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of
the cost of an item or is added as a fixed dollar value($) to an item or is applied as
a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item.
VALUE This is the actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.
NAME This is a 10 character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION’.

INPUT CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘INPUT CHARACTERS’ in ‘MMC [104] STATION NAME’.

DEFAULT DATA
All rates are %

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 761. TAX RATE (1)
Display shows: TYPE:% VAL:00.00

2. Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2 via dial button pad. TAX RATE (2)
OR TYPE:% VAL:00.00
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’. TAX RATE (2)
(Inclusive VAT) TYPE:C VAL:00.00
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Enter in the tax rate or value via dial button pad. TAX RATE (2)
OR TYPE:C VAL:01.25
Press Volume button to make selection.
If valid entry, system advances cursor.

5. Enter name using above table and press TAX RATE (2)
Right Soft button to return to step 2. NAME:MIA BED

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[762] ROOM COST RATE

This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates according to week. Each room cost
Rate can be assigned with the percentage of the room cost from Sunday to Saturday.

EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150 %, 1. MON: 100 %, 2.TUE: 090 % ...

If you set $100 for the room cost in CHECK-IN procedure under above condition.
The real room cost will be $150 on Sunday and $90 on Tuesday.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the hotel function is enabled at ‘MMC 813 HOTEL
OPERATION'.

DEFAULT DATA
All rates are 100 %

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 762. RM COST RAT(SUN)
Display shows: 100% :

2. Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 2) RM COST RAT(TUE)

OR 100% :
Press Volume button to select day and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090) RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :090

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and
an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message will be displayed.

CONDITIONS
A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits
0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 800. ENABLE TECH.PROG
Display shows: PASSCODE:

2. Enter passcode. ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗

Correct code shows: ENABLE TECH.PROG

DISABLE TENANT:1

Incorrect code shows: ENABLE TECH. PROG

PASSCODE ERROR

3. Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable. ENABLE TECH.PROG

OR ENABLE TENANT:1
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move tenant number and
enter tenant number(1-2).

4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE

SELECT PROG.ID

5. Enter the MMC desired.(e.g., 209) 209:AOM MASTER

AOM NOT EXIST

6. To log out and return to MMC 800, press

Volume button to select DISABLE.
OR
Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to
normal display.
Programming option will time out.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician Program
from its current value.

CONDITIONS
The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old
passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 801. TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

2. Enter new passcode. TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

3. Enter new passcode again. TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :∗∗∗∗

4. If passcode is correct, press Right Soft TECH. PASSCODE

key to continue and enter desired MMC. VERIFY :SUCCESS

If passcode is incorrect. TECH. PASSCODE

VERIFY :FAILURE

System returns to step 2. TECH. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Allows the System Administrator to have access to certain MMCs. For example,
it is required that the System Administrator customer have access to MMC 102 Call
Forward for call forwarding but it is not required that the System Administrator have access
to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans. This MMC is for both tenants.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 802. CUST.USE MMC :1
Display shows: 100:STN LOCK:YES

2. Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad. MMC TENANT:1

OR 100:STN LOCK:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad. MMC TENANT:1

OR 102:CALL FWD:YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad. MMC TENANT:1

OR 102:CALL FWD:NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to
make additional entries.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP

Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a per-cabinet, slot and port basis.
The simple rule is Cabinet-Slot-Port = Tenant. The simplicity of this program allows for
flexible assignments. The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT 1

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 803. TENANT GROUP
Display shows: C:1 S:1 -01 T:1

2. Enter cabinet number if no change press TENANT GROUP

Right Soft button to move cursor. C:1 S:1 –01 T:1

3. Enter slot number if no change press Right TENANT GROUP

Soft button to move cursor. C:1 S:2 -01 T:1

4. Enter port number if no change press TENANT GROUP

Right Soft button to move cursor. C:1 S:2 -03 T:1

5. Enter tenant number if no change press TENANT GROUP

Right Soft button to return to step 2. C:1 S:2 -03 T:2

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[805] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is only used for system version display. This is a READ ONLY MMC.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 805. MCP VERSION
Display shows: ‘03.07.01 L2.03

2. Press Volume button to select other Card versions.

DLI CARD C1-S2:8 DLI

Cabinet and Slot shown: NO VERSION DATA

TEPRI CARD PRI MODE C2-S1:TEPRI/EP

Cabinet and Slot shown: ‘01.08.14 V1.02

AUTO ATTENDANT CARD C1-S8:AA

Cabinet and Slot shown: ‘00.09.19 1.00

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL

Allows the preprogramming of a card slot for a specific board type. A board inserted into a
system will not be recognized by the system until it is ENABLED using this MMC. Cards
installed using MMC 806 will NOT be assigned in the system numbering plan. You must
then use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, AA, ports
or miscellaneous functions. This MMC also shows which PSU is powering the card
selected.

POWER STATUS

N: 48V Power does not used.

A: 1st Power is used.(1st Power type = PSU 60)
B: 2nd Power is used.(2nd Power type = PSU 60)
1: 1st Power is used.(1st Power type = PSU-B)
2: 2nd Power is used.(2nd Power type = PSU-B)
[xx]: The maximum port count which 48 V power is supplied.

When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted

If a card is removed and a different type card is inserted and this MMC is
performed, the memory associated with that card(e.g., key programming, etc.) will
be erased.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 806. C:1–S:1 P:1[16]
Display shows: 8 DLIÆ8 DLI

2. Press Volume button to make selection C:1–S:1 P:1[16]

(e.g., Cabinet 1) and press Right Soft button. 8 DLIÆ8 DLI

3. To select which slot to address press. C:1–S:6 P:2[16]

Volume button to make selection. 16 DLIÆ16 DLI
OR
Use the dial pad to make a selection(e.g., Slot 6) and
press Right Soft button.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

4. Press Volume button to make selection or use C:1–S:6 P:2[16]

the DIAL to select.(1: yes 0: no) RESET CARD ? NO

5. Press Volume button to make selection or use C:1–S:6 P:2[16]

the DIAL to select.(1: yes 0: no) ARE YOU SURE?NO
and press Right Soft button to return to Step 1.
Continue to add cards as shown in step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

Allows the system administrator to set the level of phone volume.

Level of Phone Volume FX

No Type No Type

0 KEY TONE VOL 0 LINE VOLUME

SPEAKERER VOLUME
1 SIDETONE VOL 1 NOR.LP ATTEN
2 HANDSET TX 2 MIC LP ATTEN
3 MIC TX LEVEL 3 ACOU DECOUPL
4 NOISE GUARD 4 ELEC DECOUPL
5 NOISE THRES 5 T/R RATIO
6 ALC THRES 6 R/T RATIO
7 TX/RX THRES.
8 TX/RX COMP
9 MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)

When changing the MMC [807]

‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the
default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

CONDITIONS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA
DEPEND ON PHONE TYPE

21D FX

Type Default Type Default

KEY TONE VOL 1 LINE VOLUME 3
SPEAKERER VOLUME 14
SIDETONE VOL 1 NOR.LP ATTEN 4
HANDSET TX 4 MIC LP ATTEN 5
MIC TX LEVEL 3 ACOU DECOUPL 8
NOISE GUARD 8 ELEC DECOUPL 8
NOISE THRES 1 T/R RATIO 2
ALC THRES 7 R/T RATIO 2
TX/RX THRES. 3
TX/RX COMP 5
MIN RX VOL 6

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 807. VOL.CONTROL:US24
Display shows: KEY TONE VOL:1

2. Enter phone type via dial keypad. VOL.CONTROL:EU24

OR KEY TONE VOL:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter volume item via dial keypad. VOL.CONTROL:EU24

OR SIDETONE VOL:1
Press Volume button to make selection and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter volume data via dial keypad. VOL.CONTROL:EU24

OR HANDSET TX :6
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[809] LEVEL AND GAIN

Allows the system administrator to set the base level of the TX volume on phones system
wide. There are eight(8) levels those are able to be controlled by the Volume button on
phone. And maximum controllable levels in the system are ten(10). Phone station users can
vary eight levels. So this MMC gives the most flexibility to the system administrator so he
can classify any desired eight(8) levels within eleven(11).

No Option Description

0 TX LEVEL CONTROL Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(Max.: 9) Default values are

followed:
INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7
1 MISC TSW GAIN Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or
the external music source of the MISC card.(0~7, higher numbers
mean lower levels) Default value is 0.
2 TSW GAIN Adjusts the tone sensitivity(As shown below, there are 8 types of
CONTROL matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity.
Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0
in MMC 421.)
0 DGP DLI phone
1 SLT SLI phone
2 ATRK Analog trunk
3 DTRK Digital trunk
4 DECT DECT terminal
5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone
6 SVMi SVMi port
7 WLAN WIP port

When changing the MMC [809]

‘MMC [809] LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

CONDITIONS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA

RX
DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN
TX
DGPÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9
SLTÆ 0.0 -2.5 0.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9
ATRKÆ 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9
DTRKÆ 0.0 -2.5 +1.9 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
DECTÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
VOIPÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
SVMiÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
WLANÆ -6.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 809. TX LEVEL CONTROL
Display shows: LEVEL 0Æ0

2. Press Volume button to make selection(0-3). TX LEVEL CONTROL

After selection is made, press Right Soft button LEVEL 1Æ1
to move cursor.

3. (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)

a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad. TX LEVEL CONTROL
OR LEVEL 1Æ1
Press Volume button to go to the next volume level
and press Right Soft button.

b. Enter desired volume data via dial pad. TX LEVEL CONTROL

OR LEVEL 1Æ3

4. (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)

a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad. MISC TSW GAIN
OR BGM/MOH :0
Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM
TSW gain and press Right Soft button.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5. (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)

a. Select the TX TWS connect type via dial button pad. TSW GAIN CONTROL
OR SLTÆDGP :+0.0
Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.

b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial button pad. TSW GAIN CONTROL
OR SLTÆATRK:+0.0
Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.

c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial pad. TSW GAIN CONTROL
OR SLTÆATRK:+1.9
Press Volume button to scroll data and press
Right Soft button.

7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[810] HALT PROCESSING

Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet
slot or in the entire system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 810. HALT/PROCESSING
Display shows: C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

2. Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad. HALT/PROCESSING

OR C:1 S:ALLÆPROC
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

Press ANS/RLS button to select all cabinets HALT/PROCESSING

and slots. C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

3. Enter slot number via dial keypad. HALT/PROCESSING

OR C:1 S:2ÆPROC
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

4. Enter 1 for HALT or 0 to PROC.

OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[811] RESET SYSTEM

Provides two methods of restarting the system. The first method restarts the system and
clears all memory. The second method restarts the system only. If clear all memory is
selected, only the default data will return. Extreme care should be taken when using this
MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is
cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.

No Type Description

0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with Smart Media read.

1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with Smart Media read.
2 FAST RESTART System reset only without Smart Media read.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 811. SYSTEM RESTART
Display shows: RESET SYSTEM?NO

2. Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad. SYSTEM RESTART

OR CLEAR MEMORY?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. SYSTEM RESTART

CLEAR MEMORY?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. SYSTEM RESTART

ARE YOU SURE?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. If clear memory, system will return with default time

and date and default extension number.
OR
If system just restarted, it will return to normal
programmed status.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE

This MMC must be run by the installer before any other programming is done.

When changing the MMC [812]

‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

CONDITIONS
Allows the system installer to select system software country. If you change the country
selection, the system will be restart and all customer data returns to defaulted status
according to the selected country.

DEFAULT DATA
According to MCP2 DIP S/W.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 812. SELECT COUNTRY
Display shows: Undefined

2. Press Volume button to make selection and SELECT COUNTRY

press Right Soft button. RUSSIA/CIS

3. Press Volume button to select Yes or No and DEFAULTING SYSTM

press Right Soft button. ARE YOU SURE?NO

When you select ‘YES’

if you select ‘YES’, this will restart the system and all data make default.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[813] HOTEL OPERATION

Allows the system installer to enable the HOTEL feature.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 813. HOTEL OPERATION
Display shows: DISABLE

2. Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE. HOTEL OPERATION

ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. HOTEL OPERATION

CHANGE NOW ? NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. HOTEL OPERATION

ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
Hotel Related MMC
MMC 222 EXTENSION TYPE
MMC 223 FAX PAIR
MMC 513 HOTEL TIMER
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP
MMC 762 ROOM COST RATE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[814] SYSTEM MMC LANGUAGE

Allows system programmer to assign a LCD display based on system programming
language.

0. ENGLISH
1. GERMAN
2. PORTUGAL

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 814. SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
Display shows: ENGLISH

2. Enter desired language number via dial button pad. SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
OR GERMAN
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

Provides a means to copy the customer database to the SMDB(Smart Media card Data
Base). This enables the on board database(SRAM) to be copied to the SMDB and also
allows the SMDB database to be copied to the on board database. A daily save can be
programmed to automatically save the on board data base to the SMDB. This insures that
an up to date database is always available in the case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save
time of 00:00 means there is no save performed.
It is recommended to CLEAR the SMDB before the SRAM is copied to it. When the
SRAM is copied to the SMDB there is no interruption in service. If the SMDB is copied to
the SRAM the system will reset to accept the new data.

Option Description

SMDB Smart Media card database

SRAM MCP2 On-Board database
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB or the time the
SRAM was last saved
DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the SMDB

A Smart Media Card of 16 MB or 32 MB

A Smart Media Card of 16 MB or 32 MB must be installed in order to copy the on
board database(SRAM) on to the Smart Media card(SMDB).

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 815. CUST DBASE:SMDB
Display shows: S:12/01/01 00:00

If the Smart Media is used already, the display shows. CUST DBASE:SMDB
SMART IS BUSY

2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SMDB

S:12/01/01 00:00

3. Press Volume button to make selection and press CUST DBASE:SMDB

Right Soft button to move cursor. CLEAR SMDB :NO

4. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and CUST DBASE:SMDB

press Right Soft button. CLEAR SMDB :YES

5. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and CUST DBASE:SMDB

press Right Soft button. ARE YOU SURE?NO

If you select YES, the display shows. CUST DBASE:SMDB

Cleared....

6. Press Volume button to make selection and CUST DBASE:SRAM

press Right Soft button to move cursor. DAILY SAVE:00:00

7. Press Volume button to make selection and CUST DBASE:SRAM

press Right Soft button to move cursor. DAILY SAVE:00:00

8. Input save time. CUST DBASE:SRAM

OR DAILY SAVE:23:30
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

9. Press Volume button to make selection and CUST DBASE:SRAM

press Right Soft button to move cursor. COPY TO SMDB:NO

10. Press Volume button to make selection and press CUST DBASE:SRAM
Right Soft button to make change and ARE YOU SURE?:YES
return to the step 9.

11. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

Change the version by downloading new version program stored Smart Media card to MCP,
TEPRI card.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 818. PGM DOWNLOAD
Display shows: MPP:MPPLV203.PGM

2. Press Volume button to select program type PGM DOWNLOAD

and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SPP:SPP_V203.PGM

3. Press Volume button to select YES and LAN PGM

press Right Soft button to move cursor. DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
If you select MCP program download,
the system will restart.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL

This MMC uses display file sizes and clear file on Smart Media card.

Files included in Smart Media are described below:

File Name Description

STARTUP.INI If a user designates an MCP or SCP program at MMC 818, related data are saved
in this file. This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs
are selected at MMC 818.
STARTUP.PRE When the system is initially started, this program uses the memory of the
MCP card to load the MPP program of Smart Media.
This program must be included to start the system.
MPPMxxx.PGM Program for MCP2 board.
MPPExxx.PGM Since the MCP2 program is not installed in the MCP2 board itself, at least
one MCP2 program must be included in Smart Media to start the system.
Files named MPPMxxxx.PGM represent programs for main-system, and
those named MPPExxxx.PGM represent programs for extended-system.
Smart Media must include the proper MCP2 program corresponding to the
system type(Extended-system or Main-system).
SPPV200.PGM LCP program. The LCP program is installed in the card itself. The one
included in Smart Media is used for S/W version upgrade.
PRIV100.PGM TEPRI program. The TEPRI program is installed in the card itself. The one
included in Smart Media is used for S/W version upgrade.
DATABASE.MPP This file is created in Smart Media when DB is saved to SMDB by MMC 815.
Initially not included, this file is created only when SMDB is created by MMC
815.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 819. STARTUP.PRE
Display shows: sz:79288 bytes

2. Press Volume button to select program type and MPPLV203.PGM

press Hold button to move cursor delete Selection sz:6783488 bytes

3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. MPPLV203.PGM

OR DELETE FILE? NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to delete file and move cursor
step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking.
Up to 50 link Ids can be entered including SELF ID. In addition each Link ID is also
associated with the IP address of the MCP2 card for that system and IP address type.

Option Description

LINK ID System ID for networking feature.

SIGNAL G/W System IP address for VoIP networking
IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type
determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ on MMC 830.

CONDITIONS
‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other
than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 820. SELF :LINK ID
Display shows:

2. Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and SELF :LINK ID

press Right Soft button. 11

3. Press Volume button to select other link ID SYS01:LINK ID

and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4. Enter other link ID via dial keypad and SYS01:LINK ID

press Right Soft button. 22

5. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC 824 ASSIGN NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

Assigns the Q-signaling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card
basis.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 821. [701] Q-SIG TRK
Display shows: NORMAL

2. Enter first trunk number of PRI card. [701] Q-SIG TRK

OR NORMAL
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALING. [701] Q-SIG TRK

OR Q-SIGNALING
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS

Assigns the class of service for networking.

No Option Default Description

01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer

03 CC PATH RSV Y CC Path Reservation
04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection
05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention
06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply
08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy
09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply
10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional
11 CI N Call Intrusion
12 CI CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)
14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)
23 CONP LEVEL 3 CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)
26 CT RE-ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting
27 DND TONE N DND Announcement
28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override
29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level(0~3)
30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level(1~3)
31 PAGE Y PAGE
32 PATH REPL. Y Path Replacement
33 PATH RETEN N Path Retention

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 823. NETWORK COS (01)
Display shows: 01:CALL OFFER :Y

2. Dial the class of service number(01-30). NETWORK COS (02)

OR 01:CALL OFFER :Y
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial the feature number. NETWORK COS (02)

OR 03:CC PATH RSV:Y
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES. NETWORK COS (01)

OR 03:CC PATH RSV:N
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to store data.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally under networking
condition, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node
extension. It’s not convenient. In this MMC, the system provides the easy digit translation
of NETWORK LCR DIAL number. The translated digits are works like as LCR plus
translated digits. Using this MMC, you only dial the another node extension number and
call the another node extension simply. The system provides 96 entry of network dial
translation.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 824. 01:601Æ
Display shows: SIZE:0 MAX:00

2. Dial the entry number. 01:601Æ_

OR SIZE:0 MAX:00
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter digit string(max. 8digits) and press 01:601Æ60201

Right Soft button to move cursor. SIZE:0 MAX:00

4. Enter the minimum number of user dialled digits. 01:601Æ60201

OR SIZE:3 MAX:00
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter the waiting number of dial until LCR is 01:601Æ60201

operated. DISP:N MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

6. Enter YES/NO to display other node extension 01:601Æ60201

like as a internal extension number format. DISP:Y MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

7. Enter YES/NO to assign Mail Box for remote 01:601Æ60201

extension automatically. DISP:Y MBX:N
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION

Assigns the options used for networking.

No Option Description

0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of
Q-SIG standard message.
1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system.
2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote
VM is used.
3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to
SVMi.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES
USE REMOTE VM: NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE
REMOTE CID NUMB: YES

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 825. ADD NUMB TO NAME
Display shows: YES

2. Dial the option number. USE REMOTE VM

OR NO
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial 1(YES) or 0(NO). USE REMOTE VM

OR YES
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

The system clock may be synchronized with a external clock source from TEPRI card, PRI
card or BRI card or use the internal clock source.

CONDITIONS
In this MMC, you can select to use internal clock source and assign the system clock
source priority when the external clock source is used. The external clock source of TEPRI
card, PRI card or BRI card only can be selected.

DEFAULT DATA
PRIORITY 1: C1-S1
PRIORITY 2: C1-S2
PRIORITY 3: C1-S3
PRIORITY 4: C2-S1
PRIORITY 5: C2-S2
PRIORITY 6: C2-S3
PRIORITY 7: C3-S1
PRIORITY 8: C3-S2
PRIORITY 9: C3-S3

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 826. REFERENCE CLOCK
Display shows: PRIORITY 1:C1-S1

2. Dial the priority number(1-9 or 1-3 ). REFERENCE CLOCK

OR PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Dial the priority data. REFERENCE CLOCK

OR PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
Press Volume button to select and Press
Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN connected device.

The eight types of data listed below can be displayed using the LAN printer.

01. SMDR
02. UCD REPORT
03. TRAFFIC REPORT
04. ALARM REPORT
05. UCD VIEW
06. PERIODIC UCD
07. HOTEL REPORT
08. PMS

The items that are set in this program are listed below.

No Option Default Description

00 DATA TYPE Type of data to be displayed

01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer
02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer
03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified items
04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)
05 PRINTER IP 200.1.1.1 The IP address of the LAN printer
06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer
07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port
08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re-transmit attempt count(00~10)
09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec)
10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)
12 PAPER SIZE A4 Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)
13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)
14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)
16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)
17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution(0.300, 1.600)
18 LINE/PAGE 60 Line per page

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 829. [01] DATA TYPE
Display shows: SMDR

2. Enter type of data to be printed. [02] DATA TYPE

OR UCD REPORT
Press Volume button to select the type and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

3. Enter the item number [02] PRINTER IP

OR 200. 1. 1. 1
Press Volume button to select the item and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

4. Select the data. [02] PRINTER IP

OR 168.219. 83.101
Press Volume to select the data and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the
OfficeServ 7200 system MCP card.

No Parameter Description

00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP2 card.

01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local network subnet.
02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.
This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP
devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP2(without
having to go through the designated network IP gateway).
03 SYSTEM RESTART Prompt to restart system MCP2 when system IP address is
changed. This reset is same to FAST RESTART on MMC 811.
04 SYSTEM IP CHANGE
05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP2 will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network, using this IP address.
Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI
card. The system identifies communications to/from this address
as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to
establish communications with the system, without exposing your
LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.
06 SYSTEM PUB PORT
07 SYSTEM DHCP
MODE
08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For your reference, and cannot be changed. The unique
hardware(MAC) address of the MCP2 card.
09 DATA SERVER IP
10 FEATUTE SVR IP
11 PCMMC ADDRESS When system wants connect to PCMMC, system will be send to
this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
12 REMOTE M/A ADDR When system wants connect to remote M & A PC, system will be send
to this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ETHERNET PARAMETERS
- The first 3 parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM
NET MASK are stored separate from the main system database, thus will not be
defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any
changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

CONDITIONS
y This MMC must be utilized if there are ITP series phones and/or MGI cards used on
the system.
y After changing the Ethernet parameter, restart the system to apply the new setting.

DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185
SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1
SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0
SYSTEM RESET: NO
SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDANT
PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101
REMOTE M/A ADDR: 168.219.1.102

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 830. SYSTEM IP ADDR
Display shows the system IP address. 165.213. 97.185

2. Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM IP ADDR

Press Right Soft button to move cursor. 165.213. 97.185

3. Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet numbers SYSTEM IP ADDR
IE 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10. 192.168.001.010
Cursor will return to Step 1 upon completion
of IP address entry.

4. Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM GATEWAY

Press Right Soft button to move cursor. 165.213. 97. 1

5. Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet numbers. SYSTEM GATEWAY
192.168.001.001
IE 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1
Cursor will return to Step 5 upon completion
of system gateway entry.

6. Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM RESTART

press Right Soft button to move cursor. ARE YOU SURE? NO

7. Press Volume button to make selection and SYSTEM RESTART

press Right Soft button to store and move cursor. ARE YOU SURE? NO

8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[831] MGI PARAMETERS

This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI
card(s). This MMC must be utilized MGI card(s) used on the system.

No Parameter Description

0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.

1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local subnet.
2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to
calculate the range if IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of
the MGI(without having to go through the designated network IP
gateway).
3 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this
IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this
MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830.
4 PUB PORT Public Port
5 VERSION No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W.

MGI PARAMETERS
- The first 3 parameters: IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK-changes to
these parameters will not be applied until the MGI is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1
GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1
SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0
IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
VERSION: V4
CARD RESET: NO

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 831. [3801] IP ADDRESS
Display shows the first MGI card. 168.219. 76.101

2. Enter MGI number. [3801] IP ADDRESS

OR 168.219. 76.101
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI parameter number. [3801] IP ADDRESS

OR 168.219. 76.101
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter MGI parameter. [3801] IP ADDRESS

OR 165. 10. 1.100
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[832] VOIP ACCESS CODE

Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway.
This MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.

TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table use for specific access codes. Usually when
the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is
used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has
63 entries(00~62).

No Option Description

0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is
accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An
access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP
address to the access code for routing. A maximum of 8 digits are
available.
1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received
to make up the whole access code.
2 DEL.LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.
If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to
the destination to continue routing at the far end destination.
3 INSERT DGT This is the digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be
used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is
needed to be inserted in the dialled digits.
4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP
address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in
each table. See MMC 833.
5 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to
associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to
start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.
Example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be
in the last 7 entries of a table the IP START location would be 8.
IP address searching would start at entry 8.
6 GK USE This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized
to establish this connection.

CONDITIONS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

DEFAULT DATA
ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9),10~62 NONE
DGT LENGTH: 1
DEL.LENGTH: 1
INSERT DGT: NONE
IP TABLE 1: 00
IP START: NONE
GK USE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 832. (O:00)ACCESS DGT
Display shows the outbound and first access 0
Code.

2. Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound) (O:00)ACCESS DGT

code table. 0
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial (O:01)ACCESS DGT

keypad. 1
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad. (O:01)ACCESS DGT

OR 1
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

5. Enter access code data via dial keypad. (O:01)ACCESS DGT

OR 840
Press Volume button to make select ion and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 836 H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[833] VoIP IP TABLE

This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC832).
There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to
route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided
into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC830 SYSTEM IP ADDR
ALL OTHERS: EMPTY

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 833. TB(00) ENTRY (00)
Display shows the first table number. 0. 0. 0. 0

2. Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad. TB(00) ENTRY (00)

OR 0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad. TB(00) ENTRY (00)

OR 0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter IP address via dial keypad. TB(00) ENTRY (00)

Cursor will be return step 3. 165.213. 87.110

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[834] H.323 OPTIONS

This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC are set
system-wide.

No Parameter Description Default

00 GATEWAY CALL ID This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies 1234

this system.
01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup ENABLE
method.
02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification ANI
type. There are 3 possible selections :
0 GWID: Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: Which shows the calling station number
2 IP: Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP
address.
06 TUNNELING Enables or disables the need for additional ENABLE
channels using H.245 signaling. Tunneling allows
use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931
channel.
07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct in 500
line number when digits are missing, or incorrect
on an inbound call.
11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation ON
when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.
14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signaling and
sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall
equipment. The common and default IP path or
port used is 10000.
17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which 1
provides calling party identification when using the
MGI as a H.323 gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A
single digit value corresponding with the desired
table in MMC323 should be entered here. This is
only used when MMC405 value is null.
18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed FOLLOW
when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway. DID TRANS
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC714
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC724
19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 DISABLE
gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834. GATEWAY CALL ID
Display shows the first option. 1234

2. Enter H.323 option number(00-19) via H.323 FAST SETUP

dial keypad. DISABLE
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad. H.323 FAST SETUP
OR ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various MGI DSP options.

No Parameter Description Default

00 AUDIO CODEC Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used G.729A –
and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets 40 Ms
generated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports
G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and
G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).
01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function ENABLE
removes echo that is generated by voice reflection and
packet delay.
02 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression ENABLE
is used This prevents transmission during the silence
period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when
enabled.
03 IN FILTER This option select input filtering of the DSP. This should
always be set as ENABLE.
04 OUT FILTER This option select output filtering of the DSP. This
should always be set as ENABLE.
05 INPUT GAIN PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-
31 dB~32 dB(0~63).
This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to
the site. Default is 32(0 dB).
06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume. The range is- 32(0 dB).
31 dB~31 dB(0~63).
07 MULTIFRAME
COUNT
08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional 4
buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets
generated by the MGI card. This value determines
whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.
The range is 00~12.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Parameter Description Default

09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter 30 ms
DELAY adjustment.
The range is 010~300 ms
10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter 150 ms
DELAY adjustment.
The range is 010-300 ms.
15 FAX ERR This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP, in the case that ENABLE
CORRECT errors are detected.
16 MAX FAX CNT This is maximum number of channels that can be 2
simultaneously utilized for Fax-over-IP. The range is
00~16.
17 MGI2 AUDIO
CODEC
18 DTMF TYPE There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND,
which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport,
and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary
method.
19 TOS FIELD An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external all bits 0
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network
infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management.
20 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP, in the 3
case that errors are detected. The range is 0~4 and 0
means no retry.
21 RTP CHK TM This options selects the interval time of sending RTCP. 5 SEC

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 835. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
Display shows the first option. G.729A –40 MS

2. Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

OR G.729A –40 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

OR G.729A –40 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter MGI DSP parameter. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

OR G.729A –20 MS
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS

Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional external industry-
standard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions, and Status
signaling(RAS). The settings are system wide.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No Parameter Description Default

00 GK CONNECTION This enables or disables the H.323 call to connect to DISABLE

a gatekeeper.
01 GK ROUTING This enables or disables routing of calls through a DISABLE
gatekeeper.
02 GK IP ADDRESS This is gatekeeper’s IP address. 0.0.0.0

03 GK NAME This is alphanumeric name identifier of the ‘Gatekeeper’

gatekeeper. An entry of 16 characters.
04 ALTER GK IP This provide for an alternate gatekeeper address. 0.0.0.0
ADDR
05 H.323 GATEWAY This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when ‘OfficeServ500’
ID registering with the gatekeeper. This can be up to 32
characters.
06 E.164 GATEWAY This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk -
NO when registering with the gatekeeper. This can be up
to 16 digits in length.
07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge 0 SEC
the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is
000~999 seconds.
08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route in case the primary PSTN
gatekeeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER
GK.
09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your AUTO
gatekeeper’s capabilities.
11 URQ REASON Select ON or OFF for usage of Un-register Request ON
MODE RAS(URQ) messages.
12 RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re-send Registration 30 seconds
Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.
The range is 1~99.
13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for usage of Gatekeeper RAS OFF
Request(GRQ) messages.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 836. GK CONNECTION
Display shows the first available option. DISABLE

2. Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad. GK ROUTING

OR DISABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter H.323 GK option data. GK ROUTING

OR ENABLE
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[837] SIP OPTIONS

This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk
parameters. The MCP supports SIP and H.323 on a per call-per-port basis. The settings are
system-wide.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No Parameter Description Default

00 GATEWAY This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this ‘1234’

CALL ID system.
01 CALLER ID This option controls the calling party identification type. -
TYPE There are 3 possible selections:
0 GWID: Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: Which shows the calling station number(Default)
2 IP: Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP
address.
05 DEFAULT DIL This allows programming of the default direct in line 500
NO number when digits are missing, or incorrect on an
inbound call.
06 UDP PORT: Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call. 5060
TRUNK
07 UDP PORT: Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070
PHONE
09 RE-TRANS. The initial re-transmission time if no answer based on the 500 ms
T1 TIME RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.
10 RE-TRANS. The maximum re-transmission time if no answer based 4000 ms
T2 TIME on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.
11 RE-TRANS. The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the 5000 ms
T4 TIME ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The
range is 0~9900 ms.
12 GENERAL The server shall retransmit the response during this 5000 ms
RING TM amount of time until the requested retransmission is
received. For example, the wait time after sending 200
OK for INFO. The range is 0~99900 ms.
13 INVITE LING After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the 5000 ms
TM client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.
The client waits for this amount of time after sending ACK
for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Parameter Description Default

14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent 180000 m
TIME shall wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends. The
range is 0~999900 ms.
15 INV.NO RESP Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User 5000 ms
TIME Agent shall wait for this amount of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
16 GEN.NO Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User 5000 ms
RESP TIME Agent shall wait for this amount of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
17 REQ.RETRY After sending General Request, the User Agent shall wait 5000 ms
TIME for the Final Response for this amount of time. The range
is 0~99900 ms.
18 SIP SERVER Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional external DISABLE
ENABLE industry-standard SIP Server.
20 SIP SERVER Sets SIP server IP address. 0.0.0.0.
IP
28 SIP SERVER Sets the port to use on the SIP Server. 5060
PORT
29 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for SIP signaling and sets a -
range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The
common and default IP path or port used is 10000.
32 SEND CLIP Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which provides 1
TABLE calling party identification when using the MGI as a SIP
gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A single
digit value corresponding with the desired table in
MMC323 should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC405 value is null.
33 INCOMING This option selects how incoming calls are routed when -
MODE the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC714(default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC724
34 ALLOW GW When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway DISABLE
CHECK to check for gatekeeper presence.
35 REGIST T-GW
NUM
36 REGIST S-GW
NUM

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834. GATEWAY CALL ID
Display shows the first option. 1234

2. Enter SIP option number(00-20) via dial keypad. CALLER ID TYPE

OR ANI
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter SIP option data via dial keypad. CALLER ID TYPE

OR IP
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO LINE TEL NUMBER
MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to
connect other device via H.323 trunk or SIP trunk. The device which use the PRIVATE IP
Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect
the device.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255
ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 838. PRIVATE IP (01)
Display shows the first table number. 0. 0. 0. 0

2. Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad. PRIVATE IP (01)

OR 0. 0. 0. 0
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter IP address via dial keypad. PRIVATE IP (01)

Cursor will be return step 3. 165.213. 87.110

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means to register the IP phones with the OfficeServ 7200 system.
During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and
Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered.
The system made default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and made default User ID’s match
the default station numbers(3201~3299). The system default password is 1234. IP phones
must be individually programmed with User ID and Password to register with the system.

No Option Description Default

00 USER ID This is the ID the IP phone must match to register first 99 IP phones
with the OfficeServ 7200 system. This entry can be are ‘3201’~‘3299’,
alphanumeric. others are EMPTY
01 USER PSWD This is the Password the IP phone must also have to ‘1234’
register with the OfficeServ 7200 system. This entry
can be alphanumeric.
02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone once 0.0.0.0.
registered with the system.
This is read only data.
03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone once FFFFFFFFFFFF
registered with the system.
This is read only data.
04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone once 6000
registered with the system. This is read only data.
This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc.
05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone once 9000
registered with the system. This is read only data.
This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc.
06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or PRIVATE
PUBLIC.
07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use. G.729A
G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).
This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection
only, others case are follow MGI CODEC type.
08 PHONE TYPE This the type of IP phone used. SAMSUNG or
SIP(future). Please should be use SAMSUNG.
09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular
IP phone. This is similar to phone plug out and
plug in, and the useful for maintenance. Because
technician will be re-registered IP phone without
network cable find out first.

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Description Default

10 FRAME This value determines the transmission interval time of 10 ms

COUNT VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data
uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN =
PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.
11 JITTER BUF Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter 20 m
adjustment. This data uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP
PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only.
The range is 10~90 ms.
12 TOS FIELD An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external all bits 0
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network
infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management. This data uses case of MMC
841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only.
13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version. This read only data.
14 S/W UPGRADE This is used IP phone software upgrade request
command. When this selects YES and press Right Soft
button, the system requests to IP phone software
upgrade with TFTP IP address.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 840. [3201]USER ID
Display shows: 3201

2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad. [3210]USER ID

OR 3210
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad. [3210]DSP TYPE

OR G.729A
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter option data via dial keypad. [3210]DSP TYPE

OR G.711
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 FIXED MGI USER
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options. The
options set in this MMC are system-wide.

No Option Description Default

0 PHONE VERSION Sets running IP-based phone and new phone 0000
software version with the system.
0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone
1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone
2 2LINE ITP2: line LCD IP-based phone
3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
software.
4 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
boot program.
5 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version
1 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP 0.0.0.0
address.
2 ITP REGISTRATION Defines the method that IP-based phones use to
registration themselves with the system.
0 TYPE: Defines the method that IP-based SYS PSWD
phones use to registration themselves with the
system.
a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones with the value contained
within parameter ITP REGISTRATION:
PSWD within this same MMC.
B) ITP PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones according to entries
made in MMC 840.
c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate
IP-based phones at all.
1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password value ‘1234’
used for registration of IP phones.
3 EASYSET OPTION Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.
0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password value ‘1234’
used for authentication of EasySet server.
1 ALIVE TIME: This is a EasySet link via LAN 0 SEC
alive check timer.

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Option Description Default

4 CTI LINK OPTION Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.
0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data NO
to CTI link via LAN.
1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to NO
CTI link via LAN.
2 ALIVE TIME: This is a CTI link via LAN alive 300 SEC
check timer. If this sets 0, the system will not
check link alive.
5 ITP DSP PARA Sets IP phone DSP parameter of system-wide.
0 M-FRAME: This value determines the 10 ms
transmission interval time of VoIP packets
generated by the IP phone. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA case only on this MMC.
The range is 10~40 ms.
1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider 20 ms
delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA case only on this MMC.
The range is 10~90 ms.
2 TOS: An eight-bit binary value that will be all bits 0
utilized by external routers, switches, etc(that
optionally support TOS-bit prioritization)-to
identify the transport-priority value of data
packets generated by the IP phone. This value
can be left at default value(00000) if your
network infrastructure does not support this
method of bandwidth management. This data
uses case only on this MMC.
3 DOWN: Determines data uses system-wide SYS DATA
data or each phone data for IP-based phone
DSP control.
a) SYS DATA: System-wide data will be
used.(MMC 841 data)
b) PHONE DATA: Each phone data will be
used.(MMC 840 data)
6 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of
each level. Defaults are followed but depend on
Country
7 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of
each level. Defaults are followed but depend on
Country

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Option Description Default

8 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level.
Defaults are followed but depend on Country
9 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each -
level. Defaults are followed but depend on Country
10 ITP VERS Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with
UPGRADE the system.
0 TYPE: Sets IP-based phone software upgrade MMC
type. COMMAND
a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone
software upgrades manually in MMC 840.
b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software
upgrades automatically at phone
connection.
c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software
upgrades automatically at set time.
1 START TIME: IP-based phone software 0000.(Disable)
automatically upgrade start time.
2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software 10 seconds.
automatically upgrade interval time.
11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link -
connection of MGI card and the system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 841. PHONE VERSION
Display shows the first available option. LARGE DGP: 0000

2. Enter option category number(0-8) via dial keypad. ITP REGISTRATION

OR TYPE: SYS PSWD
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter option number via dial keypad. ITP REGISTRATION

OR PSWD: 1234
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter option data. ITP REGISTRATION

OR PSWD: 8228
Press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[842] SIP STATION INFORMATION

This MMC provides a means to register the SIP with the OfficeServ 7200 system.

No. Parameter Description

0 USER ID When phone is registered, user ID for checking. User

1 USER PSWD When phone is registered, user Password for checking User.
2 IP ADDR IP Address of IP phone.
3 MAC ADDR Hardware Address of IP phone
4 SIG PORT IP Port to communicate with message to IP phone.
5 VOICE PORT IP Port to communicate with voice packet to IP phone.
6 IP TYPE The type of IP address(0. PRIVATE, 1. PUBLIC)
7 DSP TYPE The DSP type in case of communicating as IP phone
(0. G.711, 1. G.729A)
8 PHONE TYPE The type of IP Phone(0. SAMSUNG, 1. SIP STANDARD)
9 REGIST CLR This parameter delete information of IP phone that is registered.
10 FRAME CNT This parameter set to buffering count of voice packets in case of
transferring ones.
11 JITTER BUF This parameter provide guideline of controlling Jitter Buffering
operation when voice packet translate PCM voice packet.
12 TOS FIELD This parameter set to TOS(Type Of Service) Filed value.
13 SW VERSION This parameter is displayed version of IP Phone that is registered.
14 SW UPGRADE This parameter set to SW Upgrade

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
Parameter Default

USER ID Initail IP Phone Number(ex : 3201~)

USER PSWD 1234
IP ADDR 0.0.0.0
MAC ADDR FFFFFFFFFFFF
IP TYPE PRIVATE
DSP TYPE G.729A
PHONE TYPE SAMSUNG
FRAME CNT
JITTER BUF 2(x10MS)
TOS FIELD 00000000

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 84. [3201]USER ID
3201

2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad. [3202]USER ID

OR 3202
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter option number via dial keypad. [3202]IP TYPE

OR PRIVATE
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter option data. [3202]IP TYPE

OR PUBLIC
Press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[843] NTP SERVER INFORMATION

This MMC provides options of NTP(Network Time Protocol) Server with the OfficeServ
7200 system.
CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
Item Default

NTP SERVER USE NO

NTP SERVER TYPE DOMAIN NAME
NTP SERVER IP 0.0.0.0
NTP SERVER DOMAIN NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 843. NTP SERVER USE
NO

2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. NTP SERVER USE

YES

3. Press Volume button to make select and NTP SERVER TYPE

press Right Soft button to move cursor. IP ADDRESS

4. Enter option data.

OR
Press Right Soft button to save.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[845] WLAN PARAMETER

This MMC modifies the WLAN parameter.
Set the network configuration with the WLAN parameters, which are the SYSTEM ID, the
System KEY, and the WBS24 and SIP related with WLAN call.
The system KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a
terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but only when this value is modified to another
value, an electric power will be supplied to the WBS24, thus enabling the use of the
WLAN terminal, In addition, the System KEY serves as an identification ID when the
WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.
The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must be modified to another value in
order to use a multiple system in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally
described in this menu.
Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask, and Gateway.
These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is
essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently
up to 14 frequencies may be selected.

Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.

WLAN PARAMETER
No Parameter Description Default

00 SYSTEM ID ID used for distinguishing systems in wireless WBS24

environment. Different IDs must be assigned to
different systems.
01 SYSTEM KEY Key used for registering terminals. Different values 00000
must be assigned to each system.
st
02 1 DNS IP First Domain Name Server(DNS) IP address 0.0.0.0
nd
03 2 DNS IP Second Domain Name Server(DNS) IP address 0.0.0.0
nd
04 2 WBS IP IP addresses of all WBSs of system used by 168.208.144. 10
wireless terminal. Different IPs must be assigned
to each system.
05 CODEC LIST CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between CODEC 1: G.711a
WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and CODEC 2: NONE
G.729 can all be assigned. CODEC 3: NONE
CODEC 4: NONE
06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by USE CH 1: 01
WBS. USE CH 2: 06
USE CH 3: 11
USE CH 4: 00
USE CH 5: 00
USE CH 6: 00

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Parameter Description Default

07 VERSION WLAN module version.

08 TFTP SERVR WBS UPGRADE Server IP. 0.0.0.0
09 TFTP FILE WBS UPGRADE file name. WBS00000.TFP
10 CLR WBSREG Initializes registration data of all WBSs. NO
11 WBS TX PWR TX POWER of entire WBSs. DEFAULT

WBS PARAMETER
There are two types of WBSs, the COMBO AP and BASIC AP. A system cannot use both
types of WBSs at the same time. The AP type to be used can be set at Program 849.
Depending on the selected AP type, this program displays COMBO AP(CWBS), and
BASIC AP(BWBS).

y When using COMBO AP

WBS24 COMBO is connected to a WLI card. Up to 3 WLI cards can be connected to
an L-system, and a single WLI card can be connected to a M-system. (A single WLI
card can connect up to 8 WBS24 COMBOs.)

y When using BASIC AP

WBS24 BASIC is connected to the system through the network and requires an MGI
port to provide tone and call path connection.

No Parameter Description Default

0 IP ADDRESS WBS24 IP address for Ethernet. 0.0.0.0

1 GATEWAY Gateway address of the WBS24 Network. 0.0.0.0
2 NET MASK Netmask of the WBS24 Network. 255.255.255.0
3 MAC ADDR MAC address of WBS24 received to the system FFFF FFFF FFFF
when WBS24 is connected.
4 VERSION WBS24 Software version.
5 STATUS Alive operation status. OFF
6 USE RF CH. RF channel No. used by each WBS24 . 1, 6, or 11
7 TX POWER TX POWER of each WBS. DEFAULT
8 PARA CLR Initializes WBS registration data. NO

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

SIP PARAMETER
No Parameter Description

0 RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP,

retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.T1
TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.
1 RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC 2543
2 RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various purposes.
For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User
Agent Server(USA) after receiving ACK message in an unreliable
transmission protocol.
3 GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the server cannot be
sure if the client has received the last reply.
Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for as long as this time until
it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter
can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
4 INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the client cannot
verify if the server has received the ACK returned to the server for the
INVITE Final Response. The client waits for as long as this time after
sending the ACK for the Final Response.
5 GEN NO RESP Waiting time until canceling SIP related Request.
6 INV NO RESP Waiting time until canceling SIP INVITE Request.
7 REQ RETRY Waiting time until receiving final response for SIP related Request.
8 PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent must wait for as
long as this time until Timeout.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 845. WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24

2. When the cursor is at WLAN, press UP or DOWN WLAN: SYSTEM ID

and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP. WBS24

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3. Press Soft button and move to the SYSTEM ID. WLAN: SYSTEM ID
When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, WBS24
press UP or DOWN key and select
the setting menu for WLAN.

4. Set the items below at the WLAN menu.

SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the WLAN: SYSTEM ID
cursor Enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to WBS24
register.

Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.

Register the SYSTEM KEY. WLAN: SYSTEM KEY

00000

Register the DNS server(first) IP. WLAN: 1ST DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the DNS server(second) IP. WLAN: 2ND DNS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2nd WBS IP. WLAN: 2ND WBS IP

0. 0. 0. 0

Select the voice codec. Select from the G711a, WLAN: CODEC LIST
G711u, and G729 CODEC. CODEC 1: G.711a
Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.

Select the usable RF channel. Maximum 6 channels WLAN: RF CHANNEL

can be used for a system. USE CH 1: 01
(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)

Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS. WLAN: WBS TX PWR

(Default: LEVEL 1~4) DEFAULT

Used to clear registration information of all WBS. WLAN: CLR WBSREG

ARE YOU SURE?NO

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

5. Set the items below at the WBS24 menu The selected

WBS is according to the MMC 848 SELECT AP
TYPE(CWBS: COMBO WBS, BWBS: BASIC
WBS).
Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS. CWBS1: IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0

Register the WBS24 NET MASK. CWBS1: NET MASK

255.255.255. 0

Register the WBS24 GATEWAY. CWBS1: GATEWAY

0. 0. 0. 0

Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS. CWBS1 : MAC ADDR

FFFF FFFF FFFF

Displays the WBS24 VERSION. CWBS1 : VERSION

Displays the WBS24 STATUS. CWBS1 : STATUS

OFF

Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL(The WBS RF CWBS1 : RF CHAN

channel must be selected among the pre- USE CH 1:01
assigned RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS
item).

Register the WBS24 TX POWER. CWBS1 : TX POWER

(Default: LEVEL 1~4) DEFAULT

Used to clear the WBS parameter. CWBS1 : PARA CLR

ARE YOU SURE?NO

6. Set the items below at the menu.

Register the RE-TRANS T1. SIP : RE-TRANS T1
The initial re-transmission time if no answer 000500MS
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 500 ms)

Register the RE-TRANS T2. SIP : RE-TRANS T2

The maximum re-transmission time if no answer 004000MS
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 4000 ms)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent SIP : RE-TRANS T4
Server waits after receiving the ACK message. 005000MS
Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the GEN LING TM. The server shall SIP : GEN LING TM
retransmit the response during this amount of 006000MS
time until the requested retransmission is received.
For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for
INFO.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 6000 ms)

Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends SIP : INV RING TM
ACK for the INVITE Final Response, 001000MS
the client cannot confirm if the server received the
ACK message. The client waits for this amount of
time after sending ACK for the Final Response.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 1000 ms)

Register the GEN NO RESP Before sending Cancel SIP : GEN NO RESP
for General Request, the User Agent shall 005000MS
wait for this amount of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the INV NO RESP Before sending Cancel SIP : INV NO RESP
for the Invite Request, the User Agent 006000MS
shall wait for this amount of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)

Register the REQ RETRY After sending General SIP : REQ RETRY
Request, he User Agent shall wait for 005000MS
the Final Response for this amount of time
The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms

Register the PROVISIONAL After receiving the SIP : PROVISIONAL

Provision Response, the User Agent shall 180000MS
wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends
The range is 0-999900 ms. (Default: 180000 ms)

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[846] WIP INFORMATION

This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal’s information.

No Parameter Description Default

00 REGISTERED Shows if the terminal is registered NO

01 LOCATED Shows if the terminal is connected to the system DETACH
02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal
03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24
servicing the terminal
04 WBS NUMBE Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal
05 IP OFFSET Location of IP pool of the terminal IP
06 IP ADDRESS Terminal IP address 0.0.0.0
07 MAC ADDR Terminal MAC address 0000 0000 0000
08 USER ID User ID per terminal 1212
09 PASSWORD Password of terminal user 0000
10 INSERT DGT If 5 or more numbers are entered into the WIP
terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the
numbers, supposing that the entered numbers
do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group
number, LCR, network LCR, or function code

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 846. [3301] REGIETERED
NO

2. Dial the WIP number. [3301] REGIETERED

OR NO
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Set the items below at the menu.

Confirm the status of terminal register for each [3301] REGIETERED
phone number. NO

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Displays the location of the registered terminal. [3301] LOCATED

DETACH

Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered [3301] PHONE TYPE

terminal.

Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered [3301] WLI NUMBER

terminal.(Currently, This is not used)

Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered [3301] WBS NUMBER

terminal.

Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal. [3301] IP OFFSET

Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered [3301] IP ADDRESS

terminal.

Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered [3301] MAC ADDR

terminal.

Register the USER ID of terminal. [3301] USER ID

1212

Register the PASSWORD of terminal. [3301] PASSWORD

0000

Register the INSERT DGT of terminal. [3301] INSERT DGT

(These digits will be automatically inserted in _
front of user dialling digits when the count of user
dialling digit is exceed 4 and it does not start with
the TRK access code and FEATURE code)

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK

This MMC is used for rebooting the WBS24 all or independently. This MMC is also used
for initializing the WLI card.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and enter 847. RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO

2. Select the item number.(0: RESET, 1: STATUS) RESET :WLI :1

OR RESET NOW ? NO
Press Volume button to select item number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Select the card type.(WLI or WBS) RESET :WLI :1

RESET NOW ? NO

4. Select the card number. If you press [ANS/RLS] RESET :WLI :2

button, all WLI(or All WBS) will be selected. RESET NOW ? NO

5. Press Soft button, or press [1] to select YES, RESET :WLI :2

and the WBS will be initialized. RESET NOW ? NO

6. To verify the STATUS of WLI or WBS, select 1 STATUS: WLI

to step 2. C1S1 OFF OFF

STATUS: CWBS:01Æ
Y N N N N N N N

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST

This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP
list. This IP Address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during new registration
procedure. If the IP Address is assigned already, the assigned terminal number will be
shown in the USED field.
Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the data terminal in order to use the
wireless LAN.(Not implemented yet)

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and enter 848. IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0

2. Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST) IP:001 USED:

0. 0. 0. 0

3. Select the table number. IP:001 USED:

_ 0. 0. 0. 0

4. Enter the IP ADDRESS. IP:001 USED:

168. 0. 0. 0

5. Numbers next to USED indicates the terminal IP:001 USED:3301

number from which the IP ADDRESS was 168.219.149. 5
assigned.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION

This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.

Parameter Description

REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable the register of new WIP-500M mobile phone.
WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. The FORCED mode clearing is used
when the device is not connected normally(ex: device broken) and the
NORMAL mode clearing can be used in normal cases.
WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature
WEP KEY Assign the WEP key(13 characters only)
STATIC WBS IP Select the use of Static WBS IP
STATIC WIP IP Select the use of Static WIP IP

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE
WIP REGIST CLEAR: DISABLE
WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE
WEP KEY: None
STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE
STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE
SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPEND ON COUNTRY)

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and press 849. ENTER PASSWORD
_

2. Enter the PASSCODE to activate the register. ENTER PASSCODE

(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202 ****
WLAN REGST)

3. Select ENABLE to register the terminal to the REGISTER VoWLAN

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4. Select the WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the register WIP REGIST CLEAR
status for each terminal. 3301:FORCED

5. Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is WBS WEP SERVICE
selected. DISABLE

6. Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP WEP KEY
SERVICE is enabled.(13 characters only)

7. Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP. STATIC WBS IP

DISABLE

8. Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP. STATIC WIP IP

DISABLE

9. Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP SELECT AP TYPE

type, the system must be restarted. COMBO AP

SELECT AP TYPE
RESET SYSTEM?NO

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

This MMC is only used for system resource display. This is displayed the used resources
and the free resources. This is a READ ONLY MMC.

0. DTMFR DSP’S
1. CID DSP’S
2. R2MFC DSP’S
3. CONF GROUP’S

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 850. DTMFR DSP’S
Display shows: USE:000 FREE:012

2. Enter the option number(0-3). CID DSP’S

OR USE:000 FREE:014
Press Volume button to select.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[851] ALARM REPORTING

This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. There are two levels of
faults displayed via alarm code, major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are
usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor
alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not
seriously degrade the systems operating capabilities. The alarm buffer will hold up to 100
alarms on a first in-first out(FIFO) basis. Alarms will provide a date and time stamp based
on the system time. If applicable the hardware cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed.
If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804) alarm information can be printed on
demand and also prints as alarm information is provided.

ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)

No Option Description

0 VIEW ALARM View alarm buffer.

1 OVERFLOW Determines buffer control when buffer is full.
CONTROL 0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in
buffer overwritten.(Default)
1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording
alarms.
2 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer.
3 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.

ALARM CODE DEFINITION

See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 851. SYS ALARM REPORT
Display shows: VIEW ALARMS

2. Enter desired option. SYS ALARM REPORT

OR VIEW ALARMS
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. System displays the alarm count number, date and [00] 02/18 14:30
time stamp.(uses station, configuration for MNF02 C1-S02
display format, date, time will be 24 hour format)
Alarm type and cause code will display.

4. Press Volume button arrows to scroll through SYS ALARM REPORT

other alarms. VIEW ALARMS
OR
Press Right Soft button to return step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display the alarms on
stations that have the Alarm Key assigned. The System Alarm Key is programmed in
Station Key Assignments(MMC 722). System Alarm key programming is tenant
wide(tenant 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the System Alarm key will still
be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm
buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the System
Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system.
Alarm conditions that have multiple causes e.g., PRI errors and synchronization loss will
print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port.
The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC 851 System Alarm Reporting.

Alarm Notification
Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and
audible notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System
Alarm key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station
that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table
for assignments.

Alarm Code Definition :

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MJA-- MCP2 Error System Fault

01 MJA01 POR Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on
restart(POR).
02 MJA02 Soft Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed viA button reset.
03 MJA03 Mem Reset The system RAM has been cleared via manual
programming(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system
reset.
04 MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP2 has S/W exception error.
Alarm data = Reason
- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error
- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error
- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal opcode
- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero divide
- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation
- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop
05 MJA05 LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset
Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3)
06 MJA06 PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control
Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MJB-- LCP/TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault

08 MJB01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty.
09 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
MCP2.
10 MJB03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 1 SCP2.
11 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 2 LCP2.
12 MJB05 Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
cabinet 3 LCP2.
13 MJB06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = IPC Queue type
(MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2)
14 MJB07 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = Error Task
MJC-- DSP Error System DSP Fault
16 MJC01 DTMF Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position
17 MJC02 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
tone resources.
Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.
25 MJC10 AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
26 MJC11 AA-MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources has recovered.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
27 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
28 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
31 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
32 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

33 MJD01 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous.
34 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous.
35 MJD03 Red Alarm Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for
more than 250 ms.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
36 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
37 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on
TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
38 MJD06 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on
Rec TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
39 MJD07 Blue Alarm All one's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
40 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
41 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the when error rate exceeds 1x10-6
errors. Note: 1x10-6 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10-3 is
threshold for major alarm errors on E1,PRI or BRI.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
42 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI
Network digital line. Protocols do not match or
subscriber ID mismatch.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot Cx-Syy)
43 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
44 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
45 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
46 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
47 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
48 MJD16 BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)
49 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault

50 MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
51 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
52 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
53 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
54 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
MJE-- MGI Error MGI card Fault
55 MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI card has restarted
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
56 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
57 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
58 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects
the card doesn’t response via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
59 MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects
the card does response via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
60 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system
detects the card DSP runs not correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
61 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system
detects the card DSP runs correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
62 MJE08 WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx
63 MJE09 WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

No Code Alarm Name Definition

MNF-- Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving

64 MNF01 Card Out A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been
removed from service or is not recognized by the system
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
65 MNF02 Card In A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been
returned to service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
66 MNF03 IPC Error Inter processor communication error has occurred.
Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy)
67 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of
service is now operational.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
69 MNF06 Trunk Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk.
Disconnect External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
70 MNF07 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk
External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
71 MNF08 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
72 MNF09 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
73 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of
service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
74 MNF11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
75 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.
Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6
77 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred.
78 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of
available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
79 MNF16 PSU Alarm Indicates there are over 56 ports in a cabinet with a
single PSU and more power is required.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

No Code Alarm Name Definition

80 MNF17 PSU Alarm Rec A second PSU has been recognized when added after
alarm condition of
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
81 MNF18 SLI Fault An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an
internal CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
82 MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been
detected as recovered and is in service via internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)
83 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two
PSU.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
84 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64 button DSS modules has been
exceeded.
85 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
86 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)
87 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)
88 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)
MNG-- Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving
89 MNG01 Phone Indicates the Phone is disconnected.
Disconnect Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
90 MNG02 Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
91 MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates the Extension is Off Hook Alarm time over.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
92 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more
than 10 %.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more
than 500 ms.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

CONDITIONS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL OFF

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 852. 01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
Display shows: POR Restart

2. Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64) 64:MNF01 ACT:OFF

OR Card Out
Press Volume buttons to select desired
option and press Right Soft button and to
advance the cursor.

3. To select if the alarm is active press 1 for 64:MNF01 ACT:ON

YES and 0 for NO. Card Out
An entry will advance the cursor to return to
Step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection
and press Right Soft button to save and
return step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENT
MMC 723 SYSTEM WIDE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 851 SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY

This MMC is used to place stations, trunks, and common resources equipment in a
maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problem
equipment. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when
called. The calling stations display(if equipped) will show ‘MADE BUSY’ when called.
Stations receiving DID or E & M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The
station display will still function with station and date.
When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a locked all station. Trunks made
busy can not originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed
destination. Common resource equipment such as DSP’s, CID DSP’s and miscellaneous
equipment such as page ports, AA ports or voice mail card ports can also be placed in a
maintenance busy state.

MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS

No Option Description

0 TRK Trunks
1 STN Stations
2 PAGE Page Ports
3 AA Auto Attendant card ports
4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver(4/DSP)
5 CID CID Receiver(14/DSP)
6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver(8/DSP)
7 CONF GRP #01-24
8 MGI MGI ports

DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP
Cases of DTMFR, CID or R2MFC DSP selection when DSP is not mounted
display will show NONE. If mounted display will show IDLE by default.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
ALL IDLE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 853. MAINTENANCE BUSY
Display shows busy functions: TRK :NONEÆ

2. Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad. MAINTENANCE BUSY

OR STN :NONEÆ
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter station number. MAINTENANCE BUSY

OR STN :201ÆIDLE
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle. MAINTENANCE BUSY

OR STN :201ÆBUSY
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME

Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory
audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests
include CODEC tests on analog trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics
cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the test and retry
during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic
time during non-peak traffic periods.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 854. DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Display shows: SUN: :

2. Enter weekday number. DIAGNOSTIC TIME

(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat) SUN:_ :
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter military time hour via the dial pad. DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Cursor will advance to next entry. SUN:23:_

4. Enter military time minutes via the dial pad. DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Data saved and cursor will advance to Step 2. SUN:23:30

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[855] SYSTEM OPTIONS

This MMC provides a means to review the common use hardware that is mounted in the
system. System Options show miscellaneous hardware and daughter boards. This enables
the technician to review the available hardware without having to dismantle or power down
the system to confirm if the hardware is mounted.
This is a READ ONLY MMC.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

OfficeServ-Main System
Option Description

MCP D-BD 1 Shows the Daughter Board #1 of MCP

MCP D-BD 2 Shows the Daughter Board #2 of MCP
MCP D-BD 3 Shows the Daughter Board #3 of MCP
MCP SW Shows the DIP S/W status of MCP
LCP ONLINE Shows the Status of LCP Card
CxSy SW Shows the DIP S/W status of TEPRI card.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 855. SYSTEM OPTIONS
Display shows: MCP D-BD 1 :ESM

2. Press Volume button to view options. SYSTEM OPTIONS

MCP D-BD 2 :IPM

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technician
programming was accessed. This will allow a technician to determine if there was
unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The
information stored in this log will consist of 2 elements, the date and time it occurred at and
the access location.

There are 4 types of access location information as described below:

Type Description

NNNN This would be the extension number of a phone that had accessed programming directly.
MODEM This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated
V90 modem attached to the IOM board of main cabinet.
LAN This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN
connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet.
SIOx This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO
connections on the IOM board of the main cabinet where x is the number(2 or 3) of
the SIO port that was used.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 856. (1) 11/22 11:03Æ
Display shows: 201 :11/22 11:27

2. Enter index number.(e.g., 3) (3) 11/22 12:30Æ

OR 203 :11/22 13:30
Press Volume button to scroll.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM

Assigns the alarm for alarm information to send Remote M & A PC via LAN.

Alarm Code Definition

See Alarm Code Definition on MMC 852

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
All OFF

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 858. 01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
Display shows: POR Restart

2. Enter the alarm entry number. 02:MJA02 ACT:OFF

OR Soft Restart
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter YES or NO(1, 0) for alarming. 02:MJA02 ACT:ON

OR Soft Restart
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 2.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

This MMC is only used for system H/W EPLD version display. This is a READ ONLY
MMC.

OfficeServ 7200 System

No Option Description

0 C1 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #1

1 MCP CARD Shows the EPLD version of MCP
2 MCP B1 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #1 of MCP
3 MCP B2 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #2 of MCP
4 MCP B3 Shows the Daughter Board and EPLD version #3 of MCP
5 C2 M-BOARD Shows the Mother Board EPLD version of Cabinet #2
6 LCP CARD Shows the Status of LCP Card

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 859. H/W EPLD VERSION
Display shows: MCP CARD :V01

2. Enter the option number. H/W EPLD VERSION

OR MCP B3 :LAN :V05
Press Volume button to scroll.

3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE

This MMC is set to send the information of the UCD queue status or UCD Agent status to
the SIO port real time.

CONDITIONS
To use this information, a special PC application is needed.

DEFAULT DATA
UCD VIEW SERVICE: DISABLE
SENT AGENT STATE: NO

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 860. UCD VIEW SERVICE
Display shows: DISABLE

2. Enter the number. SEND AGENT STATE

(0. UCD view service, 1. Send Agent state) YES
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter YES or NO.(1, 0) SEND AGENT STATE

OR NO
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.

4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 804 SYSTEM I/O PARAMETER

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[889] DISPLAY SERVER STATUS

This MMC display the history list of connection and disconnection to Data Server, Feature
Server with MCP card in OfficeServ 7200 system.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 889. TOTAL LOG CNT : 00
Display shows: CLR RECORDED? NO

2. Press Volume button (01) 11/11 11:10

CONN-FEAT SERVER

3. If user press Volume button continuously, it is seeked (02) 11/13 11:20

next server connection. CONN-FEAT SERVER

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[890] INITIALIZE PORT

This program allows you to initialize items related to call process or DB for specific station
or Trunk line. This will return the port to default condition.

CONDITIONS
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
VOLUME Used to scroll through system alarms.
KEYPAD Used to enter selections
SOFT BUTTONS Enter/leave option
SPEAKER Used to store data and move to next MMC
TRANSFER Enter/exit MMC

ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 890. [201] CALL CLEAR
Display shows: ARE YOU SURE?NO

2. Enter the station or Trunk line. [202] CALL CLEAR

OR ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.

3. Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port. [202] DB INITIAL

OR ARE YOU SURE?NO
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO. [202] DB INITIAL

OR ARE YOU SURE?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to save and return step 2.

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

[900] DELETE SYSTEM PASSCODE

This mmc provides the deletion of passcode when system user forgot the system passcode.
If user delete system passcode, we recommend to changing new passcode.
The possible type of deleting passcode.

No. Type Descriptio

0 TECH. CODE TECHNITIAN PASSCODE

1 CUS. 1 CODE CUSTOMER PASSCODE OF TENANT 1.
2 CUS. 2 CODE CUSTOMER PASSCODE OF TENANT 2

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 900. CLEAR PASSCODE
Display shows: PASSCODE:_

2. Enter the passcode CLEAR PASSCODE

TECH. CODE:****

3. Enter proram type(0~2) CLEAR PASSCODE

TECH. CODE:****
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.

4. Enter HOLD button and then initiate the passcode. CLEAR PASSCODE
TECH. CODE:4321

5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNITIAN PASSCODE

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide

ANNEX A. ABBREVIATION

A
AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
AC Alternating Current
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
ALG Application Level Gateway
AME Answer Machine Emulation
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
AOM Add On Module
AP Access Point

B
BRI Basic Rate Interface

C
CA Call Agent
CCBS Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
CCNR Cell Completion on No Reply
CID Caller Identification
CLI Call Line Identification
COM Communication
COS Class Of Service
CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code
CR Mode Constant Resistance Mode
CSU Communication Service Unit
CTI Computer Telephony Integration

ANNEX A. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

D
DASL Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops
DID Direct Inward Dialling
DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications
DGP Digital Phone
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DLI Digital Line Interface
DND Do Not Disturb
DPIM Door Phone Interface Module
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DSU Data Service Unit
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency

E
E/M Ear/Mouth
EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference
ESM Expanded Switch Module

G
GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GK Gatekeeper
GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

H
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HLR Home Location Register
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

I
ID Identification
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMAP Internet Messaging Access Protocol
IN-SCP Intelligent Network Service Control Point
IOM Input/Output Module

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

IP Internet Protocol
IPC Inter Processor Communication
IPDC Internet Protocol Device Control
IPM Inter Processor Communications And Memory Module
IP-SCP Internet Protocol Service Control Point
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISUP ISDN User Part
ITM IP Telephony Module
ITP IP Telephone

K
KDB Keyset Daughter Board

L
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCP Local Control Processor
LED Light Emitting Diode
LIM LAN Interface Module

M
MCP Main Control Processor
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MEGACO Media Gateway Control
MFM Multi Frequency Module
MG Media Gateway
MGC Media Gateway Controller
MGI Media Gateway Interface
MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol
MISC Miscellaneous Function Module
MMC Man Machine Communication
MWSLI Message Waiting Single Line Interface

N
NAT Network Address Translation
NMS Network Management System

ANNEX A. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

O
OPX Off Premises eXtension

P
PAT Port Address Translation
PBA Printed circuit Board Assembly
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCMMC PC based Man Machine Communication
PLL Phase Locking Loop
POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3
PPP Point to Point Protocol
PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PRS Polarity Reverse Detection
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PSU Power Supply Unit

Q
Q-SIG Q-Signaling
QoS Quality of Service

R
RCM R2/CID Module
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RTCP Real-time Transmission Control Protocol
RTP Real-time Transmission Protocol

S
SCM Switch and Conference Module
SCP Signal Control Processor
SDP Session Description Protocol
SG Signaling Gateway
SGCP Simple Gateway Control Protocol
SIGTRAN Signaling Transport
SIO Serial Input/Output
SIP Session Initiation Protocol

OfficeServ 500 Programming Guide/Ed.00

SLI Single Line Interface

SLT Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SoL Server optimized Linux
STA Spanning Tree Algorithm
STP Signaling Transfer Point
SVMi Samsung Voice Mail integrated

T
TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface
TCAP Transmission Control Application Part
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TEPRI T1E1PRI
TRK Trunk

U
UA User Agent
UAC User Agent Client
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter
UAS User Agent Server
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UPS Uninterruptible Power System
USB Universal Serial Bus

V
VDIAL Voice Dial
VLAN Virtual LAN
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VPM Voice Processing Module
VPN Virtual Private Network

ANNEX A. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

W
WAN Wide Area Network
WBS Wireless Base Station
WIM WAN Interface Module
WLI Wireless LAN Interface

X
xDSL x-Digital Subscriber Line

OfficeServ 7200
Programming Guide

Information in this document is proprietary to SAMSUNG

Electronics Co., Ltd.
No information contained here may be copied, translated,
transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Statement
No ratings yet
Statement
4 pages
Programarea Centralei Tel PDF
100% (1)
Programarea Centralei Tel PDF
417 pages
Dyonics 640 User Manual
No ratings yet
Dyonics 640 User Manual
52 pages
g4hg Engine
No ratings yet
g4hg Engine
91 pages
OfficeServ 7070 Installation Manual (ED (1) .01)
100% (4)
OfficeServ 7070 Installation Manual (ED (1) .01)
85 pages
Trakhees Book PDF
No ratings yet
Trakhees Book PDF
68 pages
Officeserv 7200 Programming Guide
No ratings yet
Officeserv 7200 Programming Guide
409 pages
OfficeServ 7200 Programing
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 7200 Programing
409 pages
OfficeServ 7400 Call Server Programming Guide
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 7400 Call Server Programming Guide
617 pages
Manual de Programacion Os7030 Samsung
No ratings yet
Manual de Programacion Os7030 Samsung
495 pages
Manual de Programación Central Telefónica (ENG)
No ratings yet
Manual de Programación Central Telefónica (ENG)
487 pages
OfficeServ DM User Guide - Ed - 00
No ratings yet
OfficeServ DM User Guide - Ed - 00
424 pages
ServiceManual_samsung_OS7200
No ratings yet
ServiceManual_samsung_OS7200
317 pages
Officeserv Device Manager User Guide
No ratings yet
Officeserv Device Manager User Guide
53 pages
OfficeServ 7200 Data Server User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 7200 Data Server User Manual PDF
180 pages
OfficeServ 7400 Service Manual
100% (2)
OfficeServ 7400 Service Manual
491 pages
OfficeServ 12 Service Manual
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 12 Service Manual
117 pages
Users Guide 18970
No ratings yet
Users Guide 18970
204 pages
Samsung System Administrator Guide
No ratings yet
Samsung System Administrator Guide
23 pages
OfficeServ 7070 System Description - Ed02
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 7070 System Description - Ed02
95 pages
Installation Manual 40113
No ratings yet
Installation Manual 40113
91 pages
Features and Specifications: Standard Telephone User Guide
No ratings yet
Features and Specifications: Standard Telephone User Guide
0 pages
New Digital Style On Your PC and PDA
No ratings yet
New Digital Style On Your PC and PDA
2 pages
Samsung OfficeServ 7000 PBX Series
No ratings yet
Samsung OfficeServ 7000 PBX Series
12 pages
OfficeServ 7400 Programming
No ratings yet
OfficeServ 7400 Programming
490 pages
17377 Corp DL Bro V2
No ratings yet
17377 Corp DL Bro V2
2 pages
Samsung Communicator
No ratings yet
Samsung Communicator
1 page
SMT-i5210: Keyset User Guide
No ratings yet
SMT-i5210: Keyset User Guide
54 pages
Smt-I5243 User Guide
No ratings yet
Smt-I5243 User Guide
58 pages
MFP Management Guide: Multifunctional Digital Systems
No ratings yet
MFP Management Guide: Multifunctional Digital Systems
270 pages
Es 2040MFP Management Guide
No ratings yet
Es 2040MFP Management Guide
272 pages
Inbound 7106176670411055810
No ratings yet
Inbound 7106176670411055810
81 pages
MF6100 Series UsersGuide en
0% (1)
MF6100 Series UsersGuide en
1,040 pages
SMT-i3105: Keyset User Guide
No ratings yet
SMT-i3105: Keyset User Guide
49 pages
SC21-9020-4 System 36 System Reference Oct86
No ratings yet
SC21-9020-4 System 36 System Reference Oct86
1,174 pages
Device RM200B en P
No ratings yet
Device RM200B en P
292 pages
Samsung DCS 816 Programming Manual Version 2
100% (1)
Samsung DCS 816 Programming Manual Version 2
276 pages
C200H ASCII Units Operation - Manual
No ratings yet
C200H ASCII Units Operation - Manual
307 pages
Setting Guide: 7.1 Printer Overview
No ratings yet
Setting Guide: 7.1 Printer Overview
15 pages
DM - V4.98 - Release Notes
No ratings yet
DM - V4.98 - Release Notes
40 pages
IHA_BE1_en_1106
No ratings yet
IHA_BE1_en_1106
220 pages
Dyonics 640 User Manual
No ratings yet
Dyonics 640 User Manual
52 pages
4 Troubleshooting M4080 Eng
No ratings yet
4 Troubleshooting M4080 Eng
112 pages
HP 3200 Manual
No ratings yet
HP 3200 Manual
288 pages
Us11-200 812 01 01 02
No ratings yet
Us11-200 812 01 01 02
26 pages
4 Troubleshooting CLX-9x01 Eng PDF
No ratings yet
4 Troubleshooting CLX-9x01 Eng PDF
222 pages
Compact Flash Job Exchanger Instruction Manual: Motoman NX100 Controller
No ratings yet
Compact Flash Job Exchanger Instruction Manual: Motoman NX100 Controller
17 pages
7015 Enterprise Servers S70 and S7A Users Guide
No ratings yet
7015 Enterprise Servers S70 and S7A Users Guide
354 pages
Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Analog MF Telephones Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Hipath 1100 Hipath 1120 Hipath 1150 Hipath 1190: Analog MF Telephones Programming Manual
226 pages
SCX-4x20series English
No ratings yet
SCX-4x20series English
322 pages
7000 Series: Optimized Communications
No ratings yet
7000 Series: Optimized Communications
12 pages
HP Officejet Service Man
No ratings yet
HP Officejet Service Man
175 pages
IBMx225 88p9295
No ratings yet
IBMx225 88p9295
82 pages
PC LINK System Manual
No ratings yet
PC LINK System Manual
85 pages
IBM System x3550M2 Type 7946 Installation & User Guide
No ratings yet
IBM System x3550M2 Type 7946 Installation & User Guide
138 pages
Itp 5021D - Itp 5014D - DS 5021D - DS 5014D
No ratings yet
Itp 5021D - Itp 5014D - DS 5021D - DS 5014D
139 pages
How to Use the Snap-On SOLUS
From Everand
How to Use the Snap-On SOLUS
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
How to Use the Snap-On MT2500
From Everand
How to Use the Snap-On MT2500
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
Automotive Code-to-Flowchart Repair (Ford)
From Everand
Automotive Code-to-Flowchart Repair (Ford)
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
Service Desk Analyst Bootcamp: Maintaining, Configuring And Installing Hardware And Software
From Everand
Service Desk Analyst Bootcamp: Maintaining, Configuring And Installing Hardware And Software
Rob Botwright
No ratings yet
How to Use The Snap-On MODIS
From Everand
How to Use The Snap-On MODIS
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
AZ-300/303 Microsoft Azure® Architect Technologies Practice Tests
From Everand
AZ-300/303 Microsoft Azure® Architect Technologies Practice Tests
iCertify Training
No ratings yet
Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - Final
No ratings yet
Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - Final
40 pages
PHB2 PV
0% (2)
PHB2 PV
5 pages
Chi Tiet May-Nguyen Trong Hiep-Tap 1
No ratings yet
Chi Tiet May-Nguyen Trong Hiep-Tap 1
212 pages
Appliances - Packaging Guidelines
No ratings yet
Appliances - Packaging Guidelines
5 pages
2G Ericsson Recommended Parameters - G10
67% (3)
2G Ericsson Recommended Parameters - G10
60 pages
FAN-SOUND and Vibration, Balancing
100% (1)
FAN-SOUND and Vibration, Balancing
33 pages
CCNA 3 Exploration ESwitching Final Exam Form2 V 4.0
No ratings yet
CCNA 3 Exploration ESwitching Final Exam Form2 V 4.0
17 pages
Gost 31938
No ratings yet
Gost 31938
43 pages
TM25 PDF
No ratings yet
TM25 PDF
4 pages
CAST Readymix SN
No ratings yet
CAST Readymix SN
2 pages
v108 Nb-Series Host Connection Setup Manual en
No ratings yet
v108 Nb-Series Host Connection Setup Manual en
214 pages
Diesel Generator Set Technical Parameters: WWW - Fogo.pl
No ratings yet
Diesel Generator Set Technical Parameters: WWW - Fogo.pl
2 pages
N-Bio 101 W
No ratings yet
N-Bio 101 W
1 page
G7 Pre Qualification Checklist Sheetfed v1.3
No ratings yet
G7 Pre Qualification Checklist Sheetfed v1.3
6 pages
MES5324 User Manual
No ratings yet
MES5324 User Manual
208 pages
Refrigerating Systems and Heat Pumps Ð Safety and Environmental Requirements Ð
No ratings yet
Refrigerating Systems and Heat Pumps Ð Safety and Environmental Requirements Ð
42 pages
Crushing and Grinding PDF
No ratings yet
Crushing and Grinding PDF
4 pages
Method of Statement For Hydrant Pipe Joining Revised (Collar Joint)
No ratings yet
Method of Statement For Hydrant Pipe Joining Revised (Collar Joint)
5 pages
RD 50R Manual
No ratings yet
RD 50R Manual
80 pages
49c Plug Chart IEC PinSleeve
No ratings yet
49c Plug Chart IEC PinSleeve
1 page
AS6817
No ratings yet
AS6817
5 pages
Message Signaled Interrupts
No ratings yet
Message Signaled Interrupts
14 pages
Az 100 Multi Zoom
No ratings yet
Az 100 Multi Zoom
27 pages
KDF 60WF655
No ratings yet
KDF 60WF655
213 pages
HEROSE
No ratings yet
HEROSE
9 pages
Wan Miniports Problem
No ratings yet
Wan Miniports Problem
2 pages
Mepf Lecture 1 PDF
No ratings yet
Mepf Lecture 1 PDF
4 pages
M1M OP Manual
No ratings yet
M1M OP Manual
111 pages